BIBLIOTHECA INDICA ` COLLECTION OF ORIENTAL WORKS ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

New Series, Nos. 123 & 124.

KACHCHAYANO’S

PALI GRAMMAR.

TRANSLATED AND ARRANGED ON EUROPEAN MODELS; WITH CHRESTOMATHY AND VOCABULARY,

BY

FRANCIS MASON, D. D.

MEMBER OF THE ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY AND AMERICAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY,

PN ~~

“Priests, from among my clerical disciples who are able tu amplify in detail that which is spoken in epitome, the most eminent is the Great KACHUHAYANO,” GAUTAMA.

PPP DDI PAP NP LP ANP PP प

TOUNGOO : INSTITUTE PRESS, PRINTED BY SAU KDA.

1868.

e;,6 न > $ se. t aoe” * 6 oot # * “^

4 La)

e

.

|

a

|

* re we & » # »

= + . . e s é कै `= ४ 9 $ > ॐ a . aeae ea td e & . ~ 9 $ a . 9 „ भ „~ 2 ber * bd . -* 8 9 5 . ype ae aty'@ & | ॥ 1 [ भ

CARPENTIER

Preface.

The declensions and conjugations in Pali are very simple, and may be more readily acquired than either the Latin or the Greek. The principal difficulty, in reading Pali, is found in the numerous changes that are made in the roots, in the form- ation of new bases for declension and conjugation, in adding many and various particles to form derivative words, and in the permutation of words when combined into sentences.

The roots consist of one or two consonants, but the second is most frequently lost in the changes that occur, and occasion- ally the first also, 80 that not a vestige of the original root appears in the derivative, §246.

These changes are sometimes greater in Pali than even in Sanskrit. Take for instance, the word रः 9o§ nigban, which has

Peen adopted into Burmese. The root is ©) ०, TO 60, TO BLOW,

and $ ni,is prefixed in the signification of out, the word thus signifying 70 Go OUT, as a fire or light. 9 "८ is affixed to make the

verb a noun, § 256, and n is added to put it in the neuter gender, § 90.

When 8 nt is prefixed, the following consonant, v, is requis

red to be doubled, इ 75, but a dcuble wv, is changéll to a double bb, § 303. Thus the neuter noun from ni and va is ९ 1: nibbante ©

The Burmese write the second 6, p, pronounce the first g, and cut off the last syllable an, thus making the word nigban. In both the Pali and the Burmese word, all appearance of the original root is lost, but in Sanskrit, when the v is doubled, it remains unchan- ged, and the Sanskrit preposition corresponding to ni in Pali, is nir, so the Sanskrit word formed on the same base as the Pali is fa nirvedna,

S41 8664 A

w

Ne)

It has been a prominent object in the following pages, to make these changes readily understood, and thus facilitate the acquiroment of the language. The changes to which letters are subjected are recapitulated at the commencement of each letter in the Vocabulary, that the student in looking up a word, may recognize readily the root from which it is formed.

The Vocabulary furnishes the definitions.of many more words than appear in the list, because on the pages to which refer- ence is made, many derivatives will be often found defined And to make it useful to persons imperfectly acquainted with the grammar, uncommon forms are sometimes introduced with references to where explanations of them may be found. Many verbs have two or more’ bases, § 210, and while one only would be given in ordinary dictionaries, all will be usually found in this Vocabulary

` There is a great need of a full and accurate Dictionary of the language, but that 18 in good hands ` ` Our present Chief Commissioner, Col. Fytch, announced the preparation of a Pali ‘Dictionary several years ago, and we have the best authority for stating, that so soon as he can obtain Icisure, he fully intends to finish, ‘and publish the work.

Thig, book, will not be foynd free from,.typographical, and other errors, though it is believed there are none of a very se- rious character While carrying it through the press, the wri- ter was teaching Bibligal Exegesig to a large school, with Land, Surveying and use of instruments in the field, had to correct Karen Tragonometrical calculations, was writing a work in- Bur- mese on Materia Medica and Pathology, was printing an A- rithmetie.in two Karen dialects, and writtag and pripting an ele- mentary work jin three. languages, besides.the .care of seventy or eighty churches, their schools, and teachers, involying, incesr 8874 applications, and interruptions. It is not remarkable then» that, oversights .occasiqnally..occur, as. on, pages 119,12, where declined is read. on the running title instead ef, eonyuggted

Tn, writing a simijar book in Sanskrit, the assistance, of learned. pundit could he obtained, to. relieve. the, author.of mych, of the labor involved, but from, Tavoy,,,to.,Toungoo, and. तक 1830, to 1868, , not a single native has. been. found, whose.ass. sistance in such a work could be of, the. least .yalue Many; of the priests can repeat large portions of Kachchayano’s

ad

‘ik

Grammar, and yet of the prineiples of grammar they seem’ to be totally ignorant. :

Bishop Bigandet says: ‘“Phongyies are fond of exinbiting their. knowledge of the Pali language, by: repeating from memory, and without stammering or stumbling, long formulas and: senten- ces; but I have convinced myself that very few among them understood, even imperfectly, a small part of what they recited.”

It is an interesting fact that the Pali, which has the oldest alphabet in India, has been printed by Karens whose own lan- guage is among the last reduced to writing. Some of the earlier forms show their inexperiance, but the general character of the work has been commended.

The Deputy Commissioner in his official report to Govern- ment, dated 23, Oct. 1867, wrote: ‘‘The Printing department of the Institute I consider a great success. Dr, Mason has learned the printers’ art, and taught three Karens to print. The Pali Grammar, a copy of which I shall send you with a separate let- ter, has been printed by these men, and I think reflects great credit on Dr. Mason and his pupils.”

The Rev. E. B. Cross writes: “I wrote you a hasty note on Saturday, which did not fully answer my purpose. I ought first of all to have expressed my ADMIRATION of your printing in all the characters and languages which it represents, for it is certainly very neatly and BEAUTIFULLY done,”

In omnibus gratias agite.

David rex benedixit Domino coram universa multitudine et ait, Benedictus es Domine Deus Israel patris nostri ab sterno in zeternu m.

Tua est Domine magnificentia et potentia, et gloria, atque vic- toria, et tibi laus. Cuncta enim que in celo sunt et in terra, jua sunt. Tuum Domine regnum, et tu es super omnes principes.

Tuz divitie et tua est gloria, tau dominaris omnium. In manu tua virtus et potentia, in manu tua magnificare et fortifi- care omnia. Nunc igitur Deus noster confitemur tibi, et landamus nomen tuum inclytum.

Quis ego et quis populus meus ut possimus hec tibi uni- versa promittere ? Tua sunt omnia, et que de manu tua ac- cepimus, dedimus tibi. |

Peregrini enim sumus coram te et advene, sicut omnes pa-

~

Iv

tres nostri. Dies nostri quasi umbra super terram, et nulla est mora.

Benedictus Dominus Deus Israel, qui fecit mirabilia solus. Et benedictu nomen majestatis ejus in xternum, et in secu- lum seculi, et replebitur majestate ejus omnis terra. Amen, at amen.

Contents.

CHAPTER I, | THE ALPHABET.

Origin of the Pali alphabet, 3 Simplicity of the Pali alphabet, , ` ॐ Age of the alphabet, | 7 Modern alphabet, 8 The Pali language, 10 Derivation of word Pali, | 11 Extension of the Pali language, 13 Tho first Pali grammar, 14 Number of letters, * 15 Division of letters, 17 Pronounciation, | 17 CHAPTER II. PERMUTATION. Permutation—wnaen two vowELs MEET, | 21 KACHCHAYANO’S RULES, ध 27 GENERAL RULRS, 28 INSERTION OF CONSONANTS, 28 WHEN VOWELS ARE FOLLOWED BY CONSONANTS, 29 THE NASAL SYMBOL ANUSWARA, 31

CHAPTER III. TABLES OF DECLENSION,

Nouns, 34 First declension, | 34 Second declension, 37 Third declension, | 39 Irregular nouns, 42

Adjectives, 43

Participles, _- 45

Numeral adjectives, 46

Pronouns, 48

Rock-cut declension, 55

CHAPTER IV. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 57

Ir

CHAPTER V. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 68 Degrees of Comparison, 69 Numeral Adjectives, 71

Ordinal Numbers, 76 ` प्त ^ एए VI,

DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS,

Personal pronouns, 77 Possessive pronouns, 78 Reflexive pronouns, 79 Demonstrative pronouns, 79 Relative pronoun, 80 Interrogative pronoun, 80 Indefinite pronouns, : 80

CHAPTER VII.

¢ VERBS.

Voice, 81 Mood, 81 Tense, 82 Number, - 82 Person, 82 Terminations of verbs, 83 Active Voice, | 88 Middle and Passive Voice, 85 Paradigm, 27 Active Voice, 87 Passive Voice, ६9 MUTATIONS OF Y, 91 Conjugation, 93 REGULAR VERBS,, 93 SECOND CONJUGATION, 95 THIRD CONJUGATION, £6 FOURTH CONJUGATION, 97 FIFTH CONJUGATION, 97 SIXTH CONJUGATION, x 98 SEVENTH CONJUGATION, 99 EIGHTH CONJUGATION, 102 Verbs of several conjugations, 108 Causal verbs, 105

-Desiderative verbs, 107

Tir

Intensive, of Frequentive verbs, Denominative verbs, _ Réeduplicated verbs, Anomalous verbs,

Asa to BE,

Bhi to एए,

Hu to BE,

Gamu to ao,

Disa, or Dakhha to sxe,

Nyd@ to KNow,

Brit to sPEAK,

Vacha to spEak,

Vada to SPEAK,

Jara to GROW OLD,

Mara to pin, = `

Isu to wIsH,

Yamu, to RESTRAIN,

Da to Giver,

MISCELLANEOUS ANOMALIES, Participles,

Active Voice,

PRESENT PARTICIPLE,

FUTURE PARTICIPLE,

PERFECT PARTICIPLE,

Middle and Passive Voices,

PKESENT PARTICIPLE,

PAST PARTICIPLE,

CONTINUATIVE PARTICIPLE,

FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLE, Infinitive Mood,

CHAPTER VIII. INDECLINABLE WORDS,

Adverbs,

CORRELLATIVE ADVERBS,

MISCELLANEOUS ADVERBS, Prepositions, Conjunctions, Interjections,

108 110 112 115 115 117 121 124 125 125 125 126 126 126 126 127 127 127 127 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 132 133 134

135 135

` 156

137 138 138

Iv

CHAPTER IX DERIVATIVE WORDS.

Ka, yaka, tka, 148 Ta, ita, tta, tra, itta, tha, 144 N, 2, yana, ma, ttima, ya, 145 Ya, maya, eya, eyya, 145 Kara, ura, era, la, lla, ila, va, 147 Sa, ssa, &, td, vd, ti, 143 “ Dt, £ vt, u, tu, dhu, nu, nu, 149 Mma, iya, kkhatthu, dhd, 150 CHAPTER X. COMPOUND WORDS, Governing Determinate Compounds, 151 Appositional Determinate Compounds, 152 Numeral Determinate Compounds, 153 Collective Compounds, 153 Possessive Compounds, 154 Adverbial Compounds, 154 CHAPTER XI, SYNTAX, AND CHRESTOMATHY.

ARTICLES, 155 Indefinite Article, 155 Definite Article, 156 NOUNS, | 157 Nominative case, 157 Accusative case, 158 Instrumentive case, 159 Dative case, 162 Genitive case, 168 Ablative case, 164 Locative case, 165 Personal pronouns, 166 Relative pronoun, 167 Verbs and Participles, | 168 Ancient inscription on a gold scroll, 169 The longest Pali word, | 171 Gaudama’s Famous Sermon, 173

Asoka and Antiochus, 179

qu स गीिमं

INTRODUCTION

“The Buddhist traditions in Ceylon.” wrote Prof. Cowel. “all agree in calling the author of the earliest Pali grammar Kachchayd- no, and although this is said to have perished’’—“The Hon'ble G, Turnour, late Colonial Secretary of Ceylon,” says Mr. Alwis, “drew attention to some of the Pali works formerly extant in Ceylon, and amongst them, to Kachchayana’s grammar, which he then regard. ed as extinct.’—The Rev. F: Mason says: ‘The grammar reputed to have been written by Kachchayana, still exists. I had a copy made from tha palm-leaf, on small quarto paper, and the Pali text occu” pies between two and three hundred pages, while the Burmese interpretation covers more than two thousand. Imade a compend. ium of the whole, Pali and English, a few years ago, on the model of European grammars, which might be printed in one or two hundred pages, and convey all the information contained in the two or three thousand in manuscript.’’* |

This “compendium” was submitted to a committee of the Ben- gal Asiatic Society, and approved for publication in 1854, and Mr, Alwis writes that he obtained & copy in Ceylon in 1855. The exis- tenee then of Kachchayano’s work was first brought to notice from Burmah.

Many will ask: “Who was Kachchayano?’”’ The commenta- tors on his grammar say he was one of Gaudama’s disciples, select- ed by him to write a grammar of his discourses ; not a grammar of the entire language, but of that part of it used by Gaudama, bear- ing the same relation to the whole language that Winer’s Greek Grammar of the New Testament writers, does to the whole of the

Greek language.

Frem Sanskrit sources we learn that there was a Kachchaya- no, or Kakatayana, who composed a Sanskrit grammar about the age of Gaudama. Dr. ए, Buhler has shown from manuscripts re- cently discovered, that Panani “The father of Sanskrit grammar,”’

*Alwis, page 77 a

Introduction.

quotes from Kachchayano as his predeces sor, and has borrowed from him many of his grammatical terms. This establishes his anti- quity, and Dr. Buhler adds: “I believe that Kakatayana was nol a Brahman, and should not be at all astonished, if it were established by additional evidence that he was a follower of Sakyamuni.”*

The name however is not conclusive as to the authorship, for there are other writers of the same name. There were two Sans- krit grammarians of the name, and the Chinese pilgrim, Hioun~ thsang who was in India A. D 629—645, sojourned in a monastery founded by Asoka in which a Kachchayano composed a theological work three hundred years after the death of Gaudama. Still the fact that the older grammarian was not a Brahmin, goes far to sustain the Buddhist tradition /

Mr Alwis says there ean be no doubt but this grammar was written in the days of Kachchayano, but the natives prefer no such claim. ‘They say it was preserved by oral tradition for 450 years after the death of Gaudama, when with the sacred books it was committed to writing A. CU. 98. Indeed there appears to have been no books in India any where in the days of Gautama, though the people were acquainted with letters.

After Alexander came to India, the Greeks wrote that the In. dians were illiterate, and though letters were used for inscriptions on mile stones, yet ‘‘Their laws were unwritten, and that they ad-

ministered justice from memory.’ There is no good reason then to suppose that the granu ar was committed to writing before A. C. 98, and if the greatest of poems, the Iliad, has reached us by oral tradition, for it is now admitted that the Greeks had no letters in the days of Homer, there is nothing incredible in a small gram: mar being transmitted in the same way.

The condition of the manuscript accords with the later date of writing, but with the earlier it would contain anachronisms, Book II. Part 3rd. Aphorism 17, contains the following example:

ag dleoss 8 03 ¢801$800 895 kwa gato 5 - twandevdnanpiya tissa “Tissa, beloved of the Devas, whither art thou going?” ‘Now Tissa beloved of the Devas” was the king of Ceylon who

was contempory with Asoka, so the work could not have been written much before the date assigned by tradition.

*Journal of A. S. of Bengal, No. IT. 1864. tIbid. No. II 1859.

Introduction. iil

Kachchayano’s grammar carries with it internal evidence of having been composed with special reference to being committed to memory. It is first written in brief aphorisms which contain the kernel of the work, and though they occupy but twenty pages of manuscript, they contain all the grammatical principles in the book. These aphorisms are next written in paraphrase to make them more easily understood, filling fifty pages, and followiug this stra. tum isa third consisting of examples, of somewhere about one hundred pages, and outside of this again are exceptions with occa- sional annotations. Here the commentator steps up with a para- phrase on Kachchayano’s last remarks, to make all things plain.

In fact Kachchayano built his grammar precisely lke the edi- fice of the Paris exhibition. He laid down the germ of his gram- mar in the centre, and then described around it several concentric circles, each containing all the things ofa kind, and then struck out some seven hundred radii, crossing these circles, from the centre to the circumference, on each of which may be found every variety in the book, aphorism, paraphrase, example, exception or annotation, and commentary. The following is an example from B. 6, P. 4. A.3

Aphorism. ०९०85 ©) Ghatddunan vd “Sometimes of Gata et cetera.” Paraphrase.

९०६०8 ०००२§ 9००560०0: ० gev0s030) ०००६८०9 ghatadinun dhdtuman asanyogantdnan vuddhi hoti vd ८112

“On account of a causal affix, when not ending in a com- pound consonant, the vowel of the root ghata et cetera is some- times lengtLened.”

Examples. wooced3 ०००९८ aodgvod3 wguod3 ९००६०००० ghatets ghateti ghatayati ghatayati ghdtdpete ०200५ = ४००९००८०८ ९०६००००८ ghatdpett ghdtdpayati ghatdpayati ‘‘He causes to unite,” Exceptions.

००६०8२8५ Boge” 5) >>. ghatddinamtti kimatthan 41 “Why ghata et cetera?’ “He causes to go.”

iv Entroduction.

Commentary ००००9०००6}५० 0903883 os Bog 95०१०००१ 0199 bho avhariya =. ghatdnamiti padun kimuttan dchariyena == vuttan 0093 28०9 0920949 &< sooH0} psluoqcanag bh 5८58८ kareti itt «= ddisu udadharanesu 0933 mo cor ®००5०५०० 0८29 ०००१४ coogo8$ satini — karite asunyogantessa dhadtuhmt ghatddinan

820020 @Sgo a90QR5 ०॥ g १०५०००५ abhaud mind suttena viddhi nahoti

“QO Teacher! why was the aphorism ‘ghafddinan, et cetera,’ spoken by the teacher?

“Q Papil! Ghata et cetera, though of roots not ending in compound consonants, [lengthening the vowel] on account ofa causative affix, yet by this aphorism no lengthening may take place.” ‘‘He causes to do’ et cetera are also among the examples.”

The language of the commentary indicates a spoken rather thin @ written work, and it is note worthy that while the grammar is a uni- ty as a whole, it contains three small grammars, each complete in itself. (1.) The aphorisms, which are sometimes written together in a separate volume. (2.) The paraphrases, which might be wri- ten out alone, when they would form. a grammar by themselves, in- dependant of the parts that precede and follow, and (3.) The exam- ples, which written out consecutively, woald form a mass of mate- rial, from which all the grammaticle principles might be deduced in the previous parts. Nothing could be better adapted for a me- moriter work than Kachchayano’s grammar.

But on the other hand it may be said there is internal evidence that the book was originally written. When two short vowels meet they are combined into one long vowel; and Kachehayane’s lan. guage, with the following example is:

02/09 ०५5 «Matra ayan “There this.” ; “Separate the consonant from ©> —— 23 (3 its vowel.”

“In the place of the consonant OD ॐ 2 0d put the vowel.”

“Put the separated consonant 09 ॐ 90

below ©

Introduction. Vv

-“Erase the first vowel.” OD —— 9 05 ‘“Lengthen the last vowel.” 02 ------ ‘1 ५७

eS

“Unite the consonant with 2 the vowel.” > (ogous

In following out these instructions in the Kyoungs, the exam- ple is written over six times, ag exhibited step by step above in the Burmese character. Kachchayano’s pupils must have used the sty- us, but it does not necessarily follow that the whole grammar was written out.

The work is also divided into eight books treating on different

subjects, as below:

Book I. The alphabet, permutation, and combination. IT. Declension-nouns, adjectives, and pronouns. Ill. Government IV. Compound words. : V. Noun derivatives. Vi. Verbs. VII. Verbal derivatives. VIII. i west from Uhnadi affixes.

Each book is divided into several Sections, each containing from twenty to fifty aphorisms. The copy found in Ceylon by Mr, Alwis sets down the whole of the aphorisms at 687, but the copies in Burmah say there are 710. |

It is probable that we have substantially the work that was composed by Kachchayano, but if books that haye been watched o- ver like the manuscripts of the New Testament, have their alter- atians, and interpolations, it would be marvellous if Kachchayano had come down to us intact. |

The book is said ४0 have been brought to Burmah A. D. 387, by Buddhaghosa, and the Burmese translation and commentary are ascribed to him. Whoever the translator was, he was certainly a San- skrit scholar, for Sanskrit sounds not in Pali are sometimes repres- ented. Thus: “HE CROSSES,” in the text is tarati 02०43 but taraite

2००६० in the commentary, from the Sanskrit root tri तु 9 ५। 2

vi । Introduction,

A Paki grammar was published in Ceylon in 4824 by the. Rev. Benjamin Clough of, the Wesleyan Mission, but the writer sketched out the present work before he knew ofits existance, and he did not see a copy till he obtained tke loan of ane while in London, throngh the kind efforts of Dr. Hoyle, Secretary of the Wesleyan Missiona- ry Society; which was in 1854, after his manuscript had been, ap~ proved for publication. by the Bengal Asiatic Society.

It appeared however on examination that Mr. Clough’s gram- mar was not Kachchayano’s, but a translation of Mogallano’s, ॐ writer who lived A. D,1153—1(186.* Still it contains the substance of Kachchayano, and Mr. Clough’s was accompanied with a large vocabulary by the same author. Mr. Clough’s book is very accurate, and its value is proven by a new edition of his Vocabulary, with in- considerable alterations, being printed in Ceylon in 1865 with all his English definitions, but without one word of credit to Mr. Clough!

In 1863 there was published “An Introduction to Kachchaya- no’s Grammar—by James D’Alvis.” This is an exhaustive work on the subject, and is indispensible to every Pali scholar. It con tains also a literal translation of Kachchayano’s Book on verbs.

This work differs essentially from both of those named.

(1.) It takes the facts of Kachchayano’s grammar, and re-ar- ranges them in the order of cf European’ grammars, incorporating such additions from the author’s Pali readings as seem apposites Kachchayano’s grammar is herein written like Asoka’s rock- cth docum ent:

oJ ~ ~ J -

HARPS AD AL ४४८४ HA SAIL

HY Go ००8०००३ w8 ५००} 998 8coogo9

aati eua sankitena asti ` majhamena asta wstatene

“By epitome, by amplitude, and by. a middle course.”

(2.) The differences and resemblances between Pali aud Sane skrit are indicated, which will be appiegiated by an, incregsing cless oj readers.

(8.) ‘Fo make the. work as easy as possible, for students, the in- troduction of new grammatical terms, which 80 often encumber. Sanskrif, grammars, has been carefully avoided.

(4.) To make the book intelligible to European scholars, it is ‘printed im the Roman character throughout.

* Alwis, page xii.

Introduction, va,

(8:): Fo facilitate, tha study. of: tha lnguage.in Burmah,the Pali is written. also in the. Burmese alphabet.

kn. Burmah Pali is imterwoven with the. vernacular much mare. than Latin is in English. In, the Kyoungs a boy has to. learn the, multiplication table in Pah, and his first reading lessons are half | Pali and half Burmese. Dr. Judson studiously avoided the use of: Pali words, unless absolutely. necessary, yet were the Pali words im the Burmese Bible printed in colored letters, every page would be a piece of mosaic. ` -

On opening the Bible at random, there were counted in the first paragraph read, I Cor. 18: 1-8, nineteen Pali words in eight verses. Some of these are repetitions. but there are ten different words.

To exhibit this to the eye, the passage is here reprinted in English with the words that are, whole or in part, Pali in the Burmese Bi- ble printed in Antique:

“Though I speak with the tongues, of men and of angels, and have hot charity, I ८10 fon as 26 cline brass, or a tin : king cymbal And though I have the of prophecy, and un- derstend all mystexies, and all knewdedge:. and though I have, 9.1 faith, so that I could remove mountains, and have not chari- ty, lam ५4 . And though I bestow all my gopds to, feed the, p ior, and though I give my body to be burned, and have not charity, it yrofiteth me nothing. Charity suffereth long, and 13 kind: Charity envieth not; charity vaunteth noi it- self, is not puffed up, doth not behave itself unseemly: segketh not her own, is not easily provoked: thinketh no evil; rejuiceth not in iniquity but rejoiceth m the truth; beareth all things, be- lieveth ali things, hopeth @ll thinga, endureth alk things. Ohari- ty never faileth; but whether there be prophecies, they 809 | ju.l, wl ether there be tongues they. shall cease; whether there be knowledge, it shall vanish away.” |

To those then who ask Cui ७०८ ? We reply: it ig hoped that,

(1.) The work will be useful in the stydy af Burmese books. A gentleman recently called on the author with a chapter of inextri- cable difficulties in one of the books used in passing examination, and nearly all arose from unexplained Pali words and phrases.

books have been translated into English by competent Burmesa

ora

scholars, but which are inaccurate in the Palj extracts, See for example page 165, and Gaudama’s sermon.

viii Introduction.

(8:) It will be useful in translating English books into Bur- mese. The Burmans are yet to have a European literature, and those who furnish it must know how to use the Burmese language with its admixture of Pali accurately.

(4.) It will be useful to all who wish to know what the founder of Buddhism actually taught. The religious books of more than three hundred millions of people, a third of the human race, written in a highly finished language, rivaling Latin and Greek, cannot be a matter of indifference. to us, and to under- stand them, a Pali grammar is a necessity.

It can scarsely be said there is no Pali literature in the face of the king of Burmah’s Pali Bible at Mandalay, written on both sides of 729 marble slabs, containing, it is said, 131,220 lines, and 15,090,300 letters. Moreover the king ofBurmah has only about half the Betegat, as it exists in Ceylon, where it is estimated to contain 29,368,000 letters, or about ten times as many as are in the English Bible. And this is only a single book !

Nor is a knowledge of Sanskrit sufficient. Take a small spe- Cimen, for instance, from Asoka’s Pali inscriptions:

= । ^ क. a a 4 167 1*4 0४७१५५५ । *o4 FA Ob + 110५4 J 1 = = । drill dd ‘Sirs, | ।

I desire instruments of the Law, how many soever there may be, those who are mendicant priests and those who are men- dicant priestesses

Wholly misunderstanding its purport, the most distineuished Sanskrit scholar of his age rendered the clause

“J desire them to be regarded as the precepts of the law

and that as many as there may be, male and female mendicants may hear and observe them.”

And finally, a Burmese scholar of repute writes the Author “I feel extremely obliged to you for the portion of your invaluable Pali grammar Irrespectively of creed or persuasion, when the work has been published you will have no doubt conferred

a great boon upon all that would enter the arena with the Buddhists.”’

PALI GRAMMAR.

CHAPTER I.

THE ALPHABET.

When Europeans first came to India, they noticed several remarkable stone pillars, scattered in different parts of the coun- try with inscriptions cut on them. In some instances, inscrip- tions were found in three various characters. In the process of time, the languages of two were discovered, but the most ancient characters defied every attempt to decypher them.

Five centuries ago, a Mahometan sovereign assembled a num- ber of learned Brahmins to decypher the inscription on the pil- lar at Delhi, but their efforts were fruitless; anda native histo- rian wrote of it : “Round it have been engraved literal characters which the most intelligent of all religions have been unable to explain.’’*

Karly ignorant European travellers reported the pillar at Del. hi to have been erected by Alexander the Great, and the writing on it to bs Greek.* ~

From the days of Sir William Jones, the eyes of all anti- quarians im India had been directed to these inscriptions, but they were directed in vain. As late as 1833, one savan wrote of the characters: ‘‘They may be of a numerical or astronomi- cal character, as hidden to our knowledge, as are the Egyptian hieroglyphics, for the square, triangle, circle, and Mercury are to be frequently met. ”’ : ५

The first attempt to render any part of these inscriptions

was made by a Bombay scholar, who, in 1834, tronsiated the :.

first thirteen letters :*

*Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, July, 1887; Supp!~-

ment 1864; October 1894 ; and March 1838. 1

2 Alphabet. S., 2 Oe" «al 4 छ = ०७ 4 4 ०५६५० ॥४८ ८९१1१ the two ways (of wisdom and works?) with all speed do lap- proach the resplendent receptacle of the ever-moving luwminuus radiance.” In 1837, James Prinsep walked up to the inscriptions, and read them off to a wondering world, with as much apparent ease as Daniel did Mens, MENE, TEKEL, UPHARSIN, to the bewildered Babylonian monarch. Then we learned, that the first fifteen let-

ters, so sublimely rendered above, read ; “Thus said King Devanampiya Piyadasi.”’

Prinsep deciphered the alphabet as follows:

{ 4 ॥ ७ 7 ५०५ ६॥ 1(0"८ 1 ^ © m ॐ ००००० ००५१९ & $ $ UMM k kh g ghng ch chh j 1 ny t th d dh 2 ६ th PDtULbL [1 0४५ | ५५ ^ ८० 8० 9 08 9D ०००५ ® ० ॐ ५०

व क 2 p ph b bh m y r 1 wv 8 ‰ anoram. H. LDH

- (3 Rec 4u € 0

Combined with consonants the vowels were found more ful- ly developed, as:

t+ + + ++ क F 4

YD ODD त A (९ OF GOD CODD OD

kha ka ke kt hu (४ ke ko kan In his remarks on the alphabet, he says: ‘‘There isa primi- tive simplicity in the form of every letter, which stamps it at once as the original type whereon the more complicated structure of ‘the Sanskrit has been founded If carefully analyzed, each ..- member of the aiphabet will be found to contain the elements of

a

wit ~; ##६ corresponding member, not only of the Deva-négéri, but of

the Canouj, the Pali, the Tibetan, the Hala Canara, and of all the derivatives from the Sanskrit stock.’’* And he says, what has never been controverted, ^ [= consider it the primeval alphabet of the Indian languages.’’*

*Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, June, 1837.

Origin of Alphabet. 8 ORIGIN OF THE PALI ALPHABET.

All the ancient alphabets west of the Indus have been satis-

factorily traced to the Phoenician, and all east of the Indus, as shown by Prinsep above, have been derived from the Pali. The Phcenician characters were orginally hierogly phics, and were probably formed on an Egyptian basis. The origin of the Pali is not so clear. Prinsep says, that all the consonant cha- racters may be reduced to the following element s:

tdcC fl ७ ०४ । ० ^

The question next arises, whence did these elements origi- nate? If we turn to the Rosetta stone, we find every one of these characters in the Enchorial, or Demotic portion of the in- scription.

There are twenty eight lines in the Enchorial character, and . a careful examination of a fac-simile has shown, that the Pali characters are found in the different lines as noted below :

+ ¢ in line 2, 24, 27.

d ch 4, 5, 28.

C ¢ 1, 2, 4,9, 11, 14, 15, 27. ॥ ¢ 5, 8, 14.

| on 2, 3, 7, 8, 15, 26, 28.

Lb p 9, 21, 24, 29,

१ om 11. |

| + 1. and often.

4 »v ste 2.

vu 5 2.

Besides the above ten elementary characters, twelve others are found on the stone: | kh in line 1, 9, 16, 25.

॥ 9 ... 1, 21, 24.

71: 2g bes 2, 25.

६ fj st 2, 5, 6, 12, 16, 22. oe 13, 17, 20, 24, 25. O th . 1, 2, 8, 5, 27.

A ¢ .. 5, 10, 18, 18.

2 च she 26.

( ph a 11, 24. |

५ aa 12, 14, 15, 16, 21. ५ ॥ inf 1, 8, 15, 16, 20, 25. LA 2, 8.

4 Of Egyptian Origin.

The characters are not always erect on the stone, as 10 ths Pali alphabet, and they may have represented different sounds: for when new alphabets are formed from old materials, a new "power is often given to an old character. The Pali © th furnishes an example, forin the Talaing alphabet it is used for b, and when the Red Karen language was reduced to w-iting, it was made to represent v; asin Etruscan, a sound not found in Bur- mese, Talaing, or the written Karen. There are points of re- semblance between this alphabet and the Bactrian, but the forms represent different sounds. Thus ६ j, is read 1; and A g is read 4; and 7४, of the samc alphabet, has almost the identical form of ktin a Pali inscription found in the Malayan Peninsula.*

So in a published alphabet of Hieroglyphic Inscriptions, se- veral have the same, or nearly allied forms, as the Pali letters, but they often represent different powers, and occasionally have the the same form in a different position. Thus:

4 in the Hieroglyphics represents k, but in Pali d.

1 i ५४ n si d.

५ ‘As sas k ४६ chh.

|, 2 is nearly identical with the Pali = 7, and

५ k isthe same figure ashe Pali + ¢ butin a differ- ent position,

It is impossible for two sets of characters, so nearly alike» - tohave originated independantly of each other, impossible because here is no parallel in history They must have had a common origin, and since the Enchorial character is Egyptian, we are shut up tothe conclusion, that the Pali letters have had an Egyptian origin.

The fact seems improbable, but it is not so improbable as it at first appears. It 18 no more improbable that one portion of the Pali speaking people should use an alphabet derived from Ezypt, than that another part should use one derived from Phe nicia; but the nineteenth century has disinterred an abundance of monuments and coins, which prove that the inhabitants of Bactria and the Cabul vailey wrote Pali anterior to the Christian era, in an alphabet formed on a Phoenician basis.

Under the name of “The cave character”, Dr. Wilson writes of Asoka’s alphabet: “We now see clearly that the great trouble taken with the adjustment ofthe cave character would have been

*Compare Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, July 1848, Plate 1V ; with Journal Royal Asiatie Society, Vol. XX,Plate IV,

Simplicity of Alphabet. ॐ

Unnecessary, if we had noticed sufficiently early its correspondence with the Phenician and Greek alphabets, froma combination of which it is manifestly derived.” |

An Egyptian race is supposed to have had rule in Nineveh at a period anterior to authentic history. Mr. Thomas, the dis- tinguished archeologist, wrote of certain Assyrian inscriptions: “These inscriptions afford at any rate monumental evidence of - the contact of an Egyptianized race, far beyond the confines of the mother-country, with foreign nations, whose habitat lay, in one case certainly, eastward.—We have now to note what were the people who, as Sir Gardner Wilkinson says, ‘at a very re- mote period’ occupied India inconnection with the ancient inha- bitants of the Nile valley.”

That Egypt was not unknown to India, even in the days of A- soka, we bave indications fiom his inscriptions containing the name of Ptolomy king of Egypt, and Magus, son-in-law of Ptolomy Svter.

^ | ४ Dd¥Ad ०१००००७०} ed’ Turamdyo cha Magda ८८ SIMPLICITY OF THE PALI ALPHABET. The Pali alphabet is perhaps the simplest of all known al- phabets, ancient or modern. Professor Williams gives, in his

Grammar, ‘“‘the elements of the Devanagari character,” and writes down forty. All the Pali characters are formed from

A. straight line | or, A* triangle 7 €, A rectangle [] 8, A circle () th, A dot ० which may be regarded as a small

circ'e ; or some parts of them, or some combination of their parts. Thus we have formed of right lines:

Lu Lé@ +k ८

=>

[ 2 [| 6 dD © A g ^ ¢ id Ph hry gdh 8 च in. And all the vowels when following consonants.

From the circle, great and small, there are made ;

^) th ©) th ( £ ८ im ६

a © a final 2» cr m.

6 Perfection of Alphabet.

A right line W:th a circle, or its parts, forms,

© v त ch त ch D dk Ya

A perpendicular with a curve furnish: 3;

1 ४ bp hy wh & Ww gh

The same figure with the termination capped by a horizon- tal lime, or a curve, affords; + 1 ८ # ७ pah

More than forty alphabets may be seen, placed for compa- rison ona single sheet, all taken from ancient inscriptions; and if the inventor of the Pali alphabet were acquainted with the whole, he must have been a giant in intellect compared with his foivy predecessors, if they did precede him, to form, from such a chaos of material, a system of such order and symmetry, as the Pah alphabet developes.

But the skill of the inventor is seen less in the forms adopt- ed, than in the system that prevails throughout the alphabet.

The letters were manifestly formed with regard to the organs

that enunciated them. Hence the cerebals and dentals appear to have been made to correspond with each other. Thus:

© th, was the cerebal : () th, the dental

॥ d a 0 d

८ ah Sf D dh

Tn क |

The nasal n, is varied from a common form thus ;

The gutteral was [ng The palatal ny

The cerebal I 2 The dental | 1x

Piinsep remarked; ‘There is a remarkable analogy of form in the semivowels r 1 y | च J) which tends to prove their hav- ing been formed on a consistant principle. The h [८ is but the 1 | reversed.”* He observes again, that the aspirates and the smooth mutes have bcen mainly formed from .each other; and it is worthy of remark, that the aspirate, when formed from the

vuaspirated letter, always take an addition, Thus: d ch takes an additional half cirele to form त chh. So also ( £ द ४ Oth. And (1 p takes a trrn at its extremity to make © ph. From

‘| kh appears to have been made irregularly \y gh.

* Journal of Asiatic Society of Benga', June, 1857.

Age of Alphabet. 7

The mode of denoting vowels, when following consonants, was incomparably more simple and definite, than the mode adopted in any of the westren alphabets. A consonant alone, had a sho:t a@ understood. To make a long 4, a line was drawn to the right,

As: JT kha € ta To mark e, the 1106 was drawn to the left, As: K ge -( fe

Both lines were used to denote 0,

As: ए gho L yo

A perpendicular line was drawn on the top of the letter to make short 7, and two for long ४ As:

J wld old us mi ६ ४ | ५८ ¢ uw U and 4 were formed in a similar manner by lires drawn at the boitom of the letter, as: L pu 5 phi [] bu L yt | n | 11 Occasionally % was made by drawing the line horizontally, instead of perpendicularly ; and both modes may be sometimes seen in the same line, as: A_tw a du

AGE OF THE ALPHABET,

Nothing is known of the time when the alphabet was invent- ed, but it is certain from all tradition that it was in use before the days of Gaudama. On the other hand, it appears probable that it was formed after letters were in use in Assyria, for the inventor 8९661108 to have been acquainted with a square or rectangular al- phabet that has been called the ‘‘Nimroud Enchorial’’, of which Mr. Thomas published an inscription*; for the general appear- ance of the character is much more like Pali, than any other anterior to Asoka’s edicts. The following specimens are identical :

Tok fs 710

But other forms show a decided affinity with the cuneiform cha- racter, so the Pali alphaket must have originated after the form- ation of the cuneiform charactor, but not later than the sixth cen- tury before the Christian era. |

* Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, January, 1850.

8 | Modern Alphabet. MODERN ALPHABET.

Like the Pheenician, the Pali letters seem to have been soon subjected to change; but the changes are few of them improve- ments. Prinse» has given an instructive plate, showing the chanzes that had been made in the character at different periods, from the alphabet of Asoka’ s edicts to the modern Sanskrit, and square Pa- hi of Burmah.*

The oldest form of the alphabet that has been found on the eastern side of the Bay of Bengal, is in an inscription on a rock at the mouth of the river at Singapore, but it is so illegible that nothing can be made out of it beyond a few letters, and that the letters are not more modern, than the forms in use in the second centur y of the Christian era.

The oldest legible inscriptions were found by Col. Low: one 10 the northern part of Province Wellesley, and the other south of this, east of Penang. t Prinsep wrote: t “The style of the letter is nearly that of the Allahabad No. 2.” It seems to be of the same age as that of the Amravati inscription.§ एध are charac- terized by a small curve over the letter, which appears to have been soon changed into a straight line, as in the Allahabad No. 2.

This may be regarded as the character in which the Buddhist literature was introduced to the Eastren coast; and is the origin of the present Burmese and Talaing alphabets. It was in use, ac- cording to Prinsep, in the fifth century, anterior to anew form which prevailed in the seventh century; and which was carried with Buddhism into Tiket. — |

Buddhachosa, according to Burmese authorities, brought the Pa- li books to Pegu in the fifth century, at the time this alphabet was used in India, and having been found actually engraven on rocks near the borders of southern Burmuh ; the evidence harmonizes.

The forms of the Burman and Talaing characters afford further testimony to the fact, for they are more easily traced to the alpha- bet of that age than to any other. At the time the Amra- vati inscription was made, the short 7, when following a consonant, had keen changed from a straight line to a circle; and the long 7

*Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, March 1838, Plate XIII +Ibid, July 1848 plate IV; and Vol. IV,p!ate 1. णन, July 1843 §Ibid, March 1837, plateXI. ।

Burmese Alphabet. 9

was designated by a circle with a dot in it; koth of which have keen retained in the Barmese and Talaing to the present diy, while ther ceased to be nsed in the Sanskrit before the seventh century. In ike manner, the e, the & and the o, were change! to curve* cown the side of of the letter; the way they are now written in ull the alphabets on the Eastern coast

In the modern Sanskrit, an oblique straight line is drawn un- der a consonant, to indicate that the inherent vowel is destroyed. and the consonant is final. At the time the Amravati inscription was made, the same thing was denoted by a slightly curved stroke above the letter, turning to the right; and this is precisely the pro sent Barmeze mole of 12177, or killing, the vowel of a ti- n2l consonant. 82 also the symbols representing 7 and y when. combined with a preceding consonant, were nearly the same.in Amravati that they are now in Burman ८.

In the Amrarati, the long arms of several of the Ictters were cnt off 90 as to bring them very near the correspondiug Burmese

character. Thus: | | (५ became, (५ became y (4 ०७५8०९6 ७ J, became, & became $ De) © (9 OOo O

Several other Burman letters are merely the rounded or other wise slightly varied forms of Asoka’s characters, 88: Ag Dn dchh 64 ९ pd 0 क (2 ir dis ¢ Cc 20 @ ॐ © oO नै ॐ

It may be affirmed then without fear of contradictian, thet there 18 no modern alphabet which approaches the old Pali character eo nearly as the Burmese, and that there is therefore no character 14 which Pali is now written, 80 well entitled to be called the Pali: character, as the square Pali of Birmvh.

The ag? of the Am-avati inscription has uot been ea:certai ned, but the letters bear 2 strong resemblance to the character on cop” per plate grants dated at the close of A. D. 400. Prot. Dowson on these grants,* and Mr. Thomas on the coins of Kranander,+ have both shown that different forms of writing oxistéd contempo- raneously, but since this date synchronizes nearly with tke date cf tke tntre’tction af Budhiem into Burmah, they confirm each other

*Jour. Royal Asiatic Society: N.S. Vol. I page 247. {Ibid 447° 2

{0 Pali and Majttha.

THE PALI LANGUAGE.

Acsord'n to som of the Pali books, the Mazadha luneurge 35 the langaaga spoxea by the people of Magadha, the Sakata* by ti:c pespla of Sake$at, or Oade, defined by native interpreters as San- skrit, waile Pali is not the language of any tribe of men but the language of tha Buddhas.

As the last Buddha was a native of Magadha, Pali and Maga- dha ara usually regarded as tho same language, and it is often eal- led PalieMagadha:t but some of the books make a very marked dis- tinction, representing Pali a3 the original lancnaze of the Gods, or Buddhas, and Magadha as the original language of men.

In ००७ 9०1६1, Gaudama goss back to the origin of the universe before the first Buddha had appeared, and he represents the crea ~ tor a3 a female, who, after she had created animals, and appomted them their several abodes, gave them name3 Nine of those names are given, which are all Pali, and itis alded that this lan _ guage, without giving it any name, was the first lanzvaze spoken and when Budihas subsequently appeared, they every ono in sue- cession preaehed in tt

After animals were created, this divine pers:naze, or Gcdiess created three human beings, a male, a female, ards neuter. The - neuter was neglected, ard if kiled its brothar, the mate, through envy; but three children were left bohinl, 221 to Shese three were born seven soms and six daughters. The parents pronzat different animals to their children to play with, and the several words that the children uttered on beholding thom, became the names of those animals, and they are, Gandama says, in the present fl.radha lane guage, the words in common use to designate those animals. The following aré specimexs:

Pali. Magadha. ` Pali. 11०८9014. Sasa . Mo a hare. 4550 6१44 a horse 9909 © 99239 2०6) Supava San a monkey Suna Sach a dog ०१०० 2० snows 396 Kuku Ro a fowl, Byakkho {1 a tiger,

०2० ५०० ` पन "०००९ tooomse tdleBone ॥१८०१०

Derivaticn of Pals. 1%

In harmeuy with tle ebcve representation, Jina-vachana, “tke Iergrage cfile Jive” cr Eudcla, is every where fcurd in the Pa- li texts, for wkst is Cenomirated by the interpreters Pdli. Pali is never tcund in the old texts, but is used like a vernacwar word to १८६५ Jina-vachana whenever it occurs in the texis.

DERIVATION OF THE WORD PALI.

The derivation and signification of the word Pdlihas been a matter of no hitle controversy, since it was first brought to En- rose by Laloubre, who was Envoy to Siam for Louis XIV. in

1687 २.२५ 1688.* | A class of writers, following the cound, have referred the word to Pelssa, an ancient Sauskrit nam € of Behar or Magadha, to Vali a vilaze, to Pali a tower or fort, to Palestine, to the Pala- tine hills, and io Peblve. The best mocern Pali scholars reject all these derivations, but they differ among themselves as to the {प one. |

Turnour defined Pali by “Oviginal text, regularity.” Alwis contruverta this eisicment, and cays: “Nor does it mean rcot or orglau.«The werd Dell crigitally signified a 1206, row, renge.” ‘The two definitions ave not incompatille with each other. Both may be trae.

Torsone was undcubterly well aware that the etymology of the ord was Une; but etrmo'cgy dces not always give the significa- tion of a word, or tLe meaning of tragedy would be “a cong of a 3922” 5 thatis determined by the usage.

Judscn in his Burmese Dictionary, defines pdft, Pali Fathat “An czriginel text or reading”; end tke translator cf a Pali kook silts be Baddhaghosa, defines pdtha by Pali. When a word is repeated in the Pali text, he rays: “It jain the rdtha or Pali’. Al- though the word is undoubtedly Pali in modern usage, yet it would no: be Pali in the usage of the writer, unless it were found in the

atha, or origiral text. Tryrncur then is well svstained in his def’. n:tion by Bulithaghosa, and Dr. Julsca.

Pali, in its present usage, appears to havo originated with the Buddhist intorpreters, afer the criginal writings were translat- él into the vernaculars; and was inade to densie the original text,

र ap. adele chiapas hae ba ate a A aah ah ls ie Mal aS a ee - कम

*See “ESSAL SUR LE PALL, par E. 0४5 ए 6. t Pant o ॥ [शि | OIG ५११

९

12 A New Definition. `

just as exevotical writera in English, use “Oriyinal” and Original Lanquase in their utes, when referring to the Greek and Hebrew Neriptures. A somewhat parallel case is found in the word Peshito which etymulogically signifies simple, but which is constantly used jo the signification of the Syriac lonyuage.

It way be chjected to the modern origin of this usage of Pali that the word 18 found in Aaoka’s inacriptiond. Alwis writes: गए VAN CHA BEVYAN CHA ME P{LIYO VADETHA. “Thus, thus, shall ve canse to be read my, Paliyo or edicts.”

This however 13 not the reading of Ascka’s inscription, bat the reading of Spiegel’s Sanakrit trenscript.— There is no ME or mi: in the text, no long द after the p, or v, the एककल) after द is not

< bat d, and it ia‘altogether uncertain about the character + be- ine १ Ipamay be > The ventence is from the inscription ८ roand the shaft of Feroz’s Lat and, reads:

९. ae ¬ =

| - «५ ५५ ७५२५5०७

| Hevan cha hasan cha parizovadatha.

: . . Andthns, and thus, instract [ to | the cnl

Puriya, 1 Pal, sign fies the end or terminaticn.

Vad, ia the verb to apea’x, kare in the third persca plural, but with the preposition ava. changed tv o in composition, it signifies to teach. The two written ia full, would be pariya ovadathat, but by the rules of Permutacieon the initial vowel of the second word is combined with the last of the first word, and tlc le is written: pariyjovaidtha.§

The rendering given above is substantially tke tame as that first given by Prneep: “In such wise do ye address cn all sides the peuple united in religion.” |

it remains to be noted, what seems to have escsped the atter~ ticn of previous writers,.that the native lexicograpl:ers trace t etymology cf the word Pali back of the derivative noun pdli ‘a line’, to the verbal root pd ‘to preserve, take care of’, aud cay that this 13 the signification ef-the syord Pdli, and is apphed to the Pali

* Alwig’ Pah Grammar pace IV,

| द्वं वदेवं घमे पालियों nea.

r do officiis Sacerdutum Buddhicorum, page V.

0१५०(23०3}०0 0१ >0०008}0

|| Journal of Asiatic Seciety of Rengal, नापु, 1837,

PalSanekrits 13

lanvttaze, ८6९2436 ia it are preserved the discourses of the Pud- dias. They write Althan pati rakkhati itt tasma pal’.

००@६ ५4०4 gdzo29300'8

. “The significatio n, it guards preserves, sc on this account Pai.”

EXTENSION OF THE PALI LANGUAGE. Aé present Paliis a dead language found only in Bud ihisat books _ in Ceylon, Farther India, and Canina; but inseriptions in diaiccts ef Pati, dating back to the third centary before the Chrtstian era have becn found in O-issa, Behar, Ailuhabad, Delhi, the Pun’ab, , ७८2९१४६, and A’giianistan; and the kings of Bactria used it on one side of their coius, while they inscribed Greek on the other.

In north-western Incia the language was written contempora- ‘neously in two widely d'fferent alpiabets, one Aryan and the other Shemitic. The coins of Krananda, who reigned in Palibrotha, at ihe time, it is suypo.ed, that Alexander came to India, are found in great numbers with Indian Pali on one side, and Shemitic Pal; on the other in a character ncarly allied to the Pheenici.n found cn bricks from Niuevch. ‘Thus itis certain that some two thousand years ago, Pali was used from Calcutta to Cabul, written side by

pide now wiih Greex, and anon with Phenician.

Tke inference has hence been drawn, that Pali was once the vernacular dialect of all northern India, from the Bay of Bengal to

"Wthe Gulph of Cutch; and from Cuttaek to Cabul. But this is quite incredible, for that wide region, from the earliest historic times, has been inhabited by many different tribes, speaking widely Gifferent dialects

We must resort to some other hypothesis to account for the extensive u3e of Pali in official documents intended to be read by the 606. For the lack of more, trustworthy materials, we may taxe, as having a probable foundation in truth, a myth related ia the Biddhist; books. Gaudama found the truth of the adage, that

prophst has no houor ia his own country. When ha first preach- ed to h:s relatives in their vernacular language, "जु derided him and said the preceding Buddhas had always preached in Pali, while he could speak to them only in the vulgar tenzue; f:om wh.ch they drew the inference that he was no Buddha.

14 First Pall ८

“Then Ganudama thought again, an tea d ‘Taking Nha sansak ia peherena™® the learned Scnskrit Lo.E or writings, to ne .o thea of no account, Twili tenea in the ling age cfauiguly, thatis to gay 22 otia reli scucakita pakaravet che lanpucge ef tue lcarced P:li-Sangkris bock.’-—Thes having decerraired, Le priacied ia tue 197६८49 of the Banskrit Lick or ए. लु) ८,८८.2 paxéragd. Bus those who heart found २६ very ९16५८ to wude:stund.”

Accord'ny to this tradition, Pali-laaskrit wos aa od, cr dead lanyucge, in de doys cf Giucama; and if Gaudi me used a lane guage imperecsty uncerstocd by the pecplc, but popular wilh ४ menltiiwce teense a learned languace, why may not Ascks hav dene tho same tLing? The difference between the languege cf ih Inscriptions ani that of the Pali becks mav le cencecsions to tha dialects then spoken in different localities, while the Learned Fail bansekita was subsiantially retained The uze of the wontisa

Latin in the Middle Ages is something paraile.

THE FIRST PALI GRAMMAR The difficulty that Gaudama’s learers found in vaderstca tins the Pdli-Sansakita in which be preaehed, is zvipresentel az the occasion of the formation of the first Pali Grammar. Whon tho people comp!ained of not understanding the significatiin of Gau- dama’s discourses, Kachchayano one of his favo-ite disciples, after meditating on the subject, ccme before his asscciates with the pro- position, that subsequently became the first Aphozsin of his Grame ‘mar: Attho akkhard sanyato. BICNYIBAE|DIOPOISOII “The signification is known by le Gaudama finally appointed h'm the Pali © Maran, saying to the assembly : “Priests, from among my cleriezl Clacizles, who ero -able to amplify in detail that which is srocen in epitoma, the mozt emi- nsot is the Great KacncHarano.”

?

“sagyaioomovancsem?

19 भूदु0। ए ~5 22८ 26 ८022

Nunber of letters. 15

NUMBER OF LETTERS § 1. After saving that tho sienification is known by letters,

Kachchiyano procteds to state that the number of the lotters is forty one; thirty three consonants and eight vowels,- which he gives as below

(> ॐ 0 £ ¢ O WG q 2 2 £ <> ~> oO कखमगचघङ्चख धज ङ्गजयट्दड्डढदषशतय k kh g gh ng ch ८ 7 jh ny ई th d dh 9 ८ th 8 © ०0 ५० MOWQAMODMS’ दधन पफबमभमयरलवसद् छ $ n p ph bth ॐ y rl vs ¢ | aa sled ६६४५० © SATS TAU ST

| a ध £ £ ww ‰ € ० § 2. Thera are no dipththongs ia Pali, and no representatives of the Sanskrit letters

रे च खक ख द श ष

at २८ ri ri {2 1 ¢ sh § 3. The Bactrian Pali with the Phenician alphebet, kas thre sibileats, os in Sanscrit; and they have representatives in the Bur-

४1336 Sqawre Alchabet, bat they are modern additions, and have no place 1४.48 9613. | § 4. On tho other hind, there is an additional 7 in Pali not found in common Sanskrit writings; nor met in Asoka’s inscrip- tions. Jt appears to correspond to the Vedic ए which Benfey says {3 used for d in some Velie work3. In some instances, the Pali cocrasponds to d ia Swskrit.; asia the nu'néral solace” ‘sixteen’, which in Sanskzit is shedigint. This is confirmed by the form ce the letter, nearly that of a reversed %. A distinguished Sanskrit Scholar writes: “About the letter 7 in Sanskrit, strictly speaking there is only one; bat in Benzales, and to some extent in Hin- dee, the'palatal क is vary frayzaeatly p ronoanced somewhat like 1

००००० ।पोडश्न

ad

16 Comycurd Letters.

oscillating Letween that and r.” This is probably the 86०४२०२ re

presented by the second | in Pali. ` § 5. Cloagh gives’a charieter, asubstit ite for r, equivalent to,

7.४} r, ‘placed on the tcp ofa consonant but pronounce? before it’.* No snch character and no such compounds exist in Burmese Pali. It correxponis to tho Sanskrit © and appears to hare been intre- duced from the Sanskrit into Sinzalese Pali, sinc the Pali bocks vere brought to Barmah in the fifth century. According to Alwis, Megealloyana’s Grammar, which Clough translated,t was written in the twelfth century, seven hundred yeara efter the Pali books kad been bronght to Burmah.

§ 6. The following Sanskrit finals are not found in Pali:

a © a © ड णनम्‌ क्टरटत्‌पक् SA पं 70 nn m k £ p rk rt rt rp

§ 7. In Pei no word ends in ary final consonant but °, the 2398] symbol called niggahitan, and in Sanskrit anuswara.

§ 8. The aspirate 1, and the semi-vowels y, 7, and v, when u- nited with a preceding consonant, are written by a symbol; 2s:

Karho,t blacix. Anyo,§ another. Prichchhd,| sesrpio. Twan,F thon.

The symbol for hk, onthe Inccriptions, turns to the right, while

in bocks it turns to the left; as: Bamdjahmi,** “in en assembly.”

§ 9, Consonints when compounded with other consonants, u- enilly retain their normal forms, but ¢ preceded by 2, is written in & peculiar manner under the n; an dandi, tf a pilgrim.

§ 10. The double $ is conoted by a peculiar character, as: tassa tt to him. The same character, in modern Pali, is made to represent the Sanskrit sh, ¢ and shy. In the Asoka Inseriptions thig character is supplied by the sing’e s, and since it is not noti. ced by Kachchayano, it is probable that the character was un- known in books when his-Grammar was written.

*Clongh’s Pali Grammar, page 4. +Alwis’s Pali Qrammar, page XIII.

10592059 १०००2 &> es tog “yu थु. "न>

aie

Proi १0 11/*114 01611. 17 DIVISION OF LETIERS.

The first twenty five consoncnts are div:ded into live clusses- according to the organs with wh'ch they are pronoun: ५१. and the other eizht, including the enuswara, are unclassified Three vo- wels are short and five long, Kachchayano adds: Sakofa qandhesa ‘Jn the books of Oude, or in the Sanskrit books, the (छर. nants are divided into surds and sonants, and that divisiou mav ‘be approprintely advpted 19 this.’ The tw> first letters of erch clase

th the sibilant 5, are surda, while all the rest are scnin’s

§ 11. The following table ex'nbits hese ६6५९६६८] divisions at one view.

Surds. Sonauts. Surds. Sonants

Guiterals: 7 kh g gh 1g (> Palatals: ch chh j gh ny

2 0 © DW @ Cerebala: £ fh ९ dh 2 ४ GS. 2 £ MD. Dental: ¢ & द dh n FG ल अ ७ ©

Labials; p ph b bh m ^ > ~

8 OO

Unclassified: y rl us hl an 09 4 ५५ 9 ॐ OO ६.२ Skort vowels: ai u : wo स्‌ $ Long 9१ ध tt 2 0 ॥ 78) ओ) £ @ &

PRONUNCIATION. “The ancient pronunciation of the Greek can now only be inf_rred, and, im part, with great uncertuinty.

The pronunciation of modern scholars is exceedingly various

Of the different metheds that prevail, the English is probably the farthest removed from the

ancient pronunciation, With the alteration of one word, these

remarks are true of the Pali—T he Burmese is probcbly the farth est from tha ancieat pro nunciation,

“OCMMEOC RAM | 3

18 | ("श ५.८ 1071160 § 12. In Burmah the Pali ~> 3, is proaounse Like ^ ia the. The © ० is aways pronoinced iv. It was provably pron ounced -

w originally, when the last member of a compound ९ nsonant, but % in other circumstances. All the cerebals or linguals are pro- nounced 1:16 the dentals; and the aspirate sonants, cr flas muies ere not distinguished in sound from the‘: corr.sp.n ‘ing un-spiret- ed letters; and are often used interchangably in writing. The an- uswara is pronounced n, and the vowel o, ५८,

§ 13. The cerebals and dentais appear to have teen used in‘er-- ehangably in writing from the earliest period, and could not have

differed much in pronunciation. In the inser:ptions the sam® e hi क ॥ e 9°

word in the same line is occxsion!y written both ways; as: ॥ (4)

dasan, and 9 ॥, 7 dasan ten. The same diversity in writing

this numeral is found in the Pali books. § 14. So 5 th is interchanged with Qo th; as $08 natthi, ard yea natthi is not. ह § 15. So again m and ay 2 are interchanged, as in the name of the Grammarian, which is written bcth CRQOO C49

Kachchayano, and oy QUO 022 Kachehay ano

$` 16. The cérebal ए is very uncertain in its usage. In many

words where it ists d in Burmah, tke com mon 1 is fcund in Cey- Jon. Numerous examples are met in Clough’s Grammar. Thus Jig pai @ line, 28 pdli, with the small, ए in Ceylon.

52 elé cardamom, नथ, ह 9 9

A similar diversity of usage prevails in the Burmese Pali. Oc- casicpally the same word, has one in the text, and the other in the commentary : $ 17. Nothing can be inferred to determin dialects from the uaage of cerebals and dentals. Prinsep says;* ‘The word prati, a-prefixin Sanskrit—In the Pali of Girnar this 13 merely altered

to pati |) A by ommission of the r. In the language of the pil-

| lars. the same preposition is always Written pati |) ( with the cere- bal £. The orthography varies in the written Pali of books, being in Ceylonese pati, in Burmese pati.’

*Journal of Asiatic Society of Bengal, March, 1888.

Sucds and Sonants, W

§ 18. This distinction is based on imperfect deta. Cloueh spells the word pati, which skows that both modes exist in (लका. n, and the two form3 are common in Burmnah; as:

O80 299 0१222068 Pui 9 doorkeepor. Padusmd pati tastead of a lily.

§ 19 The surds end sonants are often interchanged with each other; as:

§20 qm og 02:2322<. 32 0022८02

kewith g = kahagpana gahdpand, money. $750 @ &s003 BEd ch... jf | jinarachena 1172 vajana, Words Of jina. $ 22.695 @ Scacon ६०५०० ४ ... वं nerola 217०4१५ 17११ ९6711. $ 28. 0 © ed (94; th ,., 00 pathavi padhar’, the earth. a ee ne । © © ९५.०५८ QOS Oxo th ... dh fhopelwa dhapewtd, haying placed. >) | {3 $ 28. ¢ 9 (020८८ p... b moha pate ereat Lord. | १०८८ १८८८ bute Lord of men § 26: + ry) on ae पे । $ 2 © ॐ wats ०००८९

pr... bh pharquns bialazuni, & lunar mansion.

§27. ०9 83 Boo छ... 6B bist visa, twenty.

The chanzes cf su:ds aud conen‘'s was undoubtedly the*result of pronuacistion, simitar changes occurring in other languages, and the variat.on in spelling arises from the words sometimes re- tulning their normal forms, end sometimes bring written 93 they were picnourcel,

2 1(:८८.८ fu Even

९ ४३. A प वट (८ ५2:26 ४410 have boen [02221123 { 3070 24.113 Hee (८; ag: 023 ०920 (८४ and tatra thers. In te Taseviptiona itis weitten by a singlet, as: J, A 2८7 Whore, LALA ytteystte, wherever, dyd A ००८८० every Wisrs .

§ 29. Thesymbol (f y often indicates an original form wt a dy ible 1५४५2; as: ; ¢ १८ aud aetys ©, 24731 13.33. 50070. and 5 ८/7, AN 8310 म OOM 2. ¬-& DOC

ee ^ os ~

§ 32 ए.कःण 2 d ference in pronunciation A, dh, and d are found

Orrisivisvily imsvergarissds as: gD ६3 <9 tha, wha, 1] ८7४५ 11313; ००२९ 00909 9.८.१५५ and cust, god.

§ 31. Y appews to hiva 331 proasan dj oveasiondiy, for thes2 letters 273 founl inteschingsd in the sam> word; aa:

> 222 022 = ०८९० and gueajo, ths gayal.

§ 32. JL and r also pass into each other; a8: (> 3902: D739 24 7100४ ses aii nvha sara, 324 woaalth.

§ 33. Ou sone of the Insrriptions the asirite A {3 insartel ba. fore a few wo-ds bezinvins wt vowe's, “Which,” Prin3ap says, “ay far a3 [ know, 11 ४३ no parallel 17 any of the Grammatical P. ak- its.” The same usage however is occasional:y, though not otten, found in the Pali. Instaaces ocour in tha Pitaka. Thus in the Katha, the fifth book of the Abhidhainma:

5952099 for (९ 2 ^€ <-> ¬ 9 -~~ ~ {~ & 09200372 : ‘2 © heen १५. hevan vittabbo us erin na evin vattadda, ‘Thas [0] uot thus they are not to be sail.”

ee - »क#=.~ ---------- -------~

CHAPTER IT.

PERMUTATLON.

In G cok.a vowel if short at the end of a wird, is rometimes d.cpped vhen followed by another word beginn’ng wiih a vowel; erd if long, the two vowe's are occasionally contracted ४/० cre. A final n before a cla sified lette> is usually cheaged to a letter of that class, and the clasifie] letters themselves are subject to (ल. tain clainges when united to others. In Pali, whon two words meet similar changes occur, but much more extensive: y then in Greck; and this part of the Grammar Sanskrit gram- marizus dcnominate “Combination and Permutation’; but it em- b: aces on'y the s.me things that in Greek Grammars have been }reviously nemed Contraction, Crasis, Elision and छप. phonic changes of consonants.

‘WHEN TWO VOWELS MEET. _ § 34. When one word ends ina vowol, and the next one be- {1८8 witha vowel, ore vowel is usually eubstituted for the two end attached {० the first word.

a followed by a. § 85, When a at theend of one word is followed by a at the beginning of the next, | (a.) One is elided ;as: natthi from na and aith’, ‘is not’ ; p Mt ant cog ats

Inthe whauli inscription this compound is written with the sor, vewel, | G4 nath as in book Pali.

(6.) ‘Lhe two short vowe!s are sumetimes changed to lag व; ; |

8:

02022294 og gc8ac3

tatra birati from tatra urd ubirati, “great pleasure there.” This is the rule in Sanskrit, aud in the Gisnar and other inserip- t-ons, where the verb tekes the Sanskrit form, the Sanskrit rule of Termutation is followed, and the long vowel is written: as;

a i नास्ति 11, Hs net” “~~ P

992 Pevmaigiire "7 A,

aad d followed by a. § 86. Wien a or u is iollowed Ly ¢,* they beccme a; ra: -2 112 10.01 aki: ” © CEO ~~ 2, ८.९८ irom Me, a ard ५८५६८ ५ ¢ iLou art a ali’; ४ ^ 5 ०२००९०८० ०२००१ 9००५०.

vaghdnalatse trom यदद. und élinto, “a porch, @ terraee,”

a fol'owed bi 2. § 37. When @ is followed by 7) (^) The ¬ 13 01146 1; as: | ००००८५८ - ००2०००० ६5 sotindre from 5५८५ and dure, “orgin of ha:ring. (९.) The two vowels are chanzcd to long @: 786: | ०>§००8१०००००८ = ००§ © Crom ® gc dhammo cha vinayo chatt from diuwinmo, cha, २८८८८) cha, ५५८; “Poth the law and the discipline: Thus” [ he said | (c.) The two voviels coalesce into ८; as: Og [0000 Ogio “O° bandiusséva for bandhussaanl tru, ‘a3 to ara'ative.”’ This last case is the rwie in Sanskrit, but it is the exccption in Pali.

9

` ¢ fillowed by 7. § ६8. When a long is followed by 7, the two vowels aro chan. ged to long ¢; as:

2242624 १५० 9502008" saddhitha vilan purisasea sofan 228) ६५ 8 YG aon. cong" from saddha idia uitian

purisassa sefun, “‘Ilere [i. ©. in this world] right religious ६८९. tions [ or faith | is the beat proporty cf man.”

The ॐ. (प. relea reqave the combined vowcl in this care to be e. :

a followed by ४, § 39. Wuen a is followed Ly «, (2?) The a is elided; as: . ~ On hy" Bae cS - “oo ् ८ *"At ihe cnd ot a word” eud ‘at tLe beginn’ng of anotkcr,” are ^ ५ he uneaciced in thi and che {त्‌ ट poracrap he. ar in ९९5.

Permutations of 1. 23

eltudukd for sita anl udakd, ‘chite wa'e, (b.) The two vowels coale:e2 into long ई 93

9>7)6) ०० g 2008 sidlsqu3 0 2०9५3

ned yparehichubieyin from anujdreht, cha, wburyun ८१.५११ wih anchoriies, with both.” । (८. ) The tiwo vowels are changed to 0; 83 ००६००५८ off $ ९०८५ an ygchyannapeti from sanikhyan oa upell

“Enters not into the number.” This is an except-onible case in Pati, Lut it is the rute io Sanskrit.

८ followed Ly w. § 40. Whea a long ५ is fillowcd by u, the द rcmains, and the u is changed to the semi-vowel ८ { as:

orco) ८2 oO) mecaeché frem ma end uchd, “Say not.’’

८ ० ^ fellowcd by e or o § 41. When ५ or a is followed by e or ०) it is elided; as:

o © a = J (55 5९802 592924}25 sed ona (2५०२5 sanghan tassorasen, for sanjhan tesca ८८८५८7५;

“TTis own son, the church.” Bot | 9८5 OD SCODIOD OD309 ~> tathetitan tuthd etitan ‘“Pesides tcaching.” AAR RADA Ro5) sein ॑ ¬ (29 Rar DISDIBISATQO ~~ SOBA OO ~>

sansedajo papatika from sansedajd = and cpupatikd,

‘“Freduced by filth, produced by a vis:Lle body.”

2 followed ky ४.

§ 42. When z is fol’cwed hy 7, (a.) One ¢ is elided; as:

०9208 ०७५8 ocd

` 102 for dehi ard iti, “Give! Thus” [he said. ] (b.) The two coslesce into long ४; 28; ८.2098४1592292608 ०५०2 sl} stan8 edd mahddanandassamiti from malkd, ddnan, dassdmi, iti.

“I will give the great gift: Thus” [he said. ]

24 Pernontations र This is the rule in Sanskrit, and is followed in ihe Inscriptions are: क ie f OD ep we bte + fom ०११०००० 2 ६५८

' [1 e sukatan kachhatits क sulcutan aachelhute ate “Fle attains merit: Thus” [he -aid. |*

i followed by a. § 45. When ४ is followel ly a, (a.) The ४ is el'ded; as:

०&० "०1 > ०4" $66 ॐ<> dhun-marajannumdmahan from dhammarajan, namdmi, ahan; “T wo:ehi» the king of the law.”

(b.) The ५ is olidcd; as: os Sud osiS ny vaddmihan from vraddmi ahan, “IT eay.” (c.) The £ is changed to the semi-vowel 7; as:

O$ ०>&2००(०2०० Boaogoq ०8 sc000 pafisandhdracutyassa fom pafisandhdra, vutts, assa; “Tis accurate comment.” :

(d.) Ths ८ 13 claaged to the semi-vowel y, to which the a

¢

lengthened into ¢ is attached; as: 5 9 ग. Q 22 . 2 ०९४१०२०१. 3 4 =3 20903 23,4 antariyyadnyantaran from anturtyyé@ni end antaran, “An upper garment, clothing.” ‘he Sanskrit rule requizes y in every case.

९ followed by @, or € § 44. When 7 is followed by @, or © (¢. ) The 2 is elided; as: 68222220 भ 9०2020००

1.1.11 from (ष and dkdrehi; ‘‘By three tokens.” ८१०००००३ ८२०५६ ८० nchetan from: nohi and efan, ‘*Not proper, this.”

(b.) The ८ 18 changed to the semi-vowel y, as: POY 3 od 32 — ityddi from iti ddi, “So beginning.”

* Journal of Asiatic Society of Bergal, July, 1887; where tte passage is rendered: “Shall attuin eternal happiress, (or thall Le united with 85८6470. )” |

. Permutations. of VU. 25

(०००५१208 € ५8 «tm ०४५० ekapadyekapadike from eka, pati, eka, padike, »

“A foot-path, in a foot-path.” | Caso (2. ) is the rule in Sanskrit.

4 or ¢ followed by ५. § 45 When short, or ४ long is followed by x, (a.) The £ or ८ is elided; as: 079890099093 on 82०4 22००ॐ tévisatusaban from id, visati, . and usaban; “Twenty tahs [make] a usabah.” kosampujjeniyo from kosampt, ujjeniyo: ‘*Knovj, १ (४. ) ‘Ihe £ is changed to the semi-vowel y; as + ०००३० [88 aws8 os jalanidhyudadhi from jalanidhi udadha, “Sea, ocean.” This is the rule in Sanskrit.

followed by wu § 46. When ४ is followed by , one u is elided; as

१०६०१०३० gad 02 2०

milan tusiran from milan tu usiran, “A root, kbhus-khus grass

w followed by a.

§ 47. When x is followed by a,

(a.) The a is elided; as: ०००००००७५००१९००५०३ ceosa ००००१ ००९००५०

lokahetukhinamate from loka het akhinamat, _ “The cause of the world, possessed of imperishable wisdom.”

(९) The two vowels coalesce into the semi-vowel ४; a3; 0902-3909 ०००१ %ॐ Grow dhdtwantassa fromdhatu § —antassa, “To the end of a root.’”

In Sanskrit the combined vowels become v or a.

u followed by 4. § 48. when w is followed by 4 , | (a) The % is elided: as: or ]0000$ OOBL ` 008003 chakkhdyatanan from chakkhu dyatanan ‘Abode of sight, or eye.”

26 Permututions -of” EF.

(७) The ५ is changed to the semi-vowel v, and the « is ap- pended to it; as: 22003 99 990005 sicdzatan from su dgatan, ‘Well coming.” Both cases, (a.) and (b.), accord with Sanskrit usage.

2 followed by ५.

§ 49. When w is followed by 27,

(a.) The ¢ is elided, and the « remains unchanged; as: 0221५ @ ©. gc chakkhundre from chakkhu == ९५१९, “The faculty of sight, ov eye.”

८४. ) The £ is elided, and the « lengthened into ४; as: 2००१० ०००९ | sddhuti from sddhu itt, “Good! [ he said. ]”

Both (a.) and (b. ) differ trom the Sanskrit rules, which re-

quire the semi-vowel v.

५ follewed by e. § 50. When ४ is followed by ९) it is changed to the semi- yowel v and the € remains; as: ००.885 ०8 व 8452 vattwettha vihitan from vattu ettha vikitan “Landed possessions are adjudged in this place.”

e followed by e. § आ. When € is followed by ९ one e is elided; as: 2‰&&$२0022 Cp <2& ०५७० tthandgaté from ne ettha ndgatd, “They not having arrived at that place.” This corresponds with Sauskrit usage.

e followed by a § 52. Whane is followed by a (c.) The € is changed to-the semi-vowel y and the a remains unchanged; as: qqjoosocBsoeue08, cor ॐ 00339 qunn 3, tyassa pahind honti from te ` 0356 pahiné henti, _“Lhese things have been rejected of, or by, those persons

Permutations of ©. 27

(b.) The e is changed to y, and the short ¢ is lengthened to long ८ ; as: ०2५०6 ०69८ COD 5 GO ०0४ tydian evan vadegya from te ahan evan vadeyya. ^< would speak thus to thee.”

o followed by 0१ a, 7, %, 6. § 53. When o is followed any vowel, (a-) The other vowel is elided: as:

०००८2५2 5०८८ (254

adhamo maka trom adhamo omaka, ‘Wile, inferior.” 00000 0029 S909

yohan = from = ‰० ahan, “T, who.”

O30 >न}2५ € GRO ००] ९८५

chuitérome from chattdro €, “These four.’” 99900200 €> 2५०८८

athopapati from atho upapati, ‘‘Agaiu, 8 paramour.”

(४) Before a, it is sometimes changed to the semi-vowel », and the a is lengthened into 4; as: 2० 0०22 MUD | swéhan from so ahan “This person, I.”

(c.) Occasionally it is elided; as BsygB Bs wjcgo ec | Jinabuddhiti from Jina buddho iti, “Jina-Buddha, [ it is said. J

The preceding do not embrace all possible cases, but they

inciude all of common occurrence, and many more than are found in Kachchayano’s Grammar.

KACHCHAYANO’S RULES. Kachchayano gives seven- rules: § 54. (1.) When similar vowels meet, the first is elided- § 55. (2) When dissimilar vowels meet, the last is eomee . times elided. § 96. (3.) When the first vowel has been elidedy-@ of :o - sometimes takes the place of both vowels.

§ 57. (4.) Sometimes when the firat vowel has been elided, . the second is lengthened

$ 58. (5.) When the second vowel has been elided, the first . 38 cometimes lengthened

28 ~ : Insertion of Consonants.

§ 59. (6.) A final e is sometimes changel to y. § 60. (7.) A final uw or o is sometim2s changed to v Thesa rules are not of much practical value, but no general rute3 Can be forme] that are not beset with namerous exceptions.

GENERAL RULES. The following deductions from the examples given, may be found useful for reference.

§ 61. When similar vowels meet, one is elided and the other remains unchanged. See § 35. a. § 86. § 42, a § 46. §51. § 53 Exceptions: § 85. b. § 42

§ 62. When 7 is followed by wu or ९; and when ४ or e is fol- lowed by a,

(a.) 1४13 changed to the semi-vowel y. See § 48. b. § 44. ९. § 43. ० § 52.0

(b.) When a@ or w precedes, this chanze does not take place See § 37. § 41. § 49 §.68. When ४ is followed by ० or e, or o is followed by a,

(a.) the w or o is changed tu the semi-vowel v. See § 47. ए § 50. §53. b.

(b.) This change does not oceur when a precedes u or 0; un- 1688 a be lengthened to ८. See § 39. § 41. § 40.

§ 64. Unless changed to the semi-vowel v, ० usually mainteins its position before all other vowels, and is sometimes formed by the combination of a and wu. See § 53. § 39. ५.

INSERTION OF CONSONANTS

। When one word ending in a vowel is followed by another be- ginning with a vowel, a consonant is occasionally inserted between them, and the vowels remain unchanged. The consonants used are: ६. dnwm iy. 2 1. ए. an

§ 65. ft inserted; as; - 909300309 (प्छ LD yasmatiha for yasmd thit, “On which account here.”

§ €6. . प inserted; as: CS,3,909 G 99 B00 | edantaussa for € ‘antassa, “°° *~ “For e fina’.”

§ 67. 7 imserted as: eecondscucd3 &०००० 9900909. divndyate from ‘to dyati, “From this pce he-comes."

Vowels followed by Consonants. 29

§ 68. 10 inserted; as: ०2२०० ०2 भ | kasmdmivafromkasmd = iva, “From what account, 89?”

§ 69. Y inserted: as:

00000083 0000 8 yathdyidan from yathd idan, “Besides this.”

§ 70. x inserted; as ०००990८) ००००००५) go sdsaporiva from sdsapo 2४५ “Like mustard.”

§ 71. 1 inserted; as:

2000000008 ॐ 8100005 chhaldyatanan from chha dyatanan, “Six abodes,” § 72. V inserted; as: O2SOII0[QL00 ©>५^>> ए fatovutdya from tato ufdga, “From this rising.”

§ 73. an, anuswara, inserted before consonant or vowel; as: ५६ 3282०५26 ०१६०००८३.००००5 puriman jdtin sardmi, for purimajdtin sardmi

“I remember former states of existance.’’

WHEN VOWELS ARE FOLLOWED BY CONSONANTS.

§ 74. When a word ends in a vowel and the next word begins with a consonant, the vowel is occasionally subjected to some change; as

(a.) The vowel is sometimes lengthened, as @ to d, and ४ to ४; 28;

2० &००§*&0 ००००००3. 9989 299 sammddhaman vipassato, sammd for samma:

। ‘fe who has seen well the law.”

5) ५ 2 ~ oO @ ०।००५ $079, 6)००९९6० gamemunichare for gdmermunichare.

“The Sage may dwell in the village.”

(४. ) Sometimes along yowel is shortened; as ¢ to ६; thus: 9009018 s2902000 o2090l8s007059

boxavddt ndmaso for bonavadt ndmaso, “Boarvad by av 03."

$0 Donble Consonants.

(c.) Sometimes one vowel is exzhanged for another, ` ; o, or o for a; thus ;

«००० ० @ॐ GSD99OCR9

rathamo from escdhammo, “This law.” Sa90000 8.09 ve q30900008 ५2 OQ pintaya charitu paro sahasan, paro for para;

‘‘More than a thousand to go for boiled rice.”

§ 75. When a word ends in a vowel, and the next begins with any classified letter not a nasal, that letter is doubled ; but if it be an aspirate, its corresponding unaspirated letter is used. Hence the following compound consonants are found at the beginning of words in sentences where the normal form begins with the second member of the compound:

kk ¢$ 2 tt dd tt ddl pp bb

< 8 8 & 68 8 8 8 kkh ggh chehh jjh tth ddh tth ddh pph bbh SB ॐ 8 § Bag ॐ The following examples may suffice to illustrata these ८० ४००३ : mBQscel ॐ 02&० ०)

abtkkentaro from abi kantaro, “Very desirable.”

०६०७५) ०६ 0०७5) parygaho from pa gaho, “Seizing.” G0298"00 con "00 icttinsa from te tinsa,, “Thirty three,” 009990 COQ S30 chatuidasa from chatu dasa, “Fourteen,”

~ ०0०६ 2 2 899 ८२.८06 252 from Chia visa “Twenty six.” 8१००००8) ¶ 6०2०००० SO 0५००७

९८//2/0724.10 ptrisassa from ६.४४ 2 २१.20. “Wore there is forgetfulness to moa.”

Anuswara dbefure a vowel, $1

923003 > ०५८३

nakkhamett from na kheamati, “FYe is impatient.” ८५८०-8 -१०५ COD CSDdD0CCO QP pS SCO esevachajjhanuphalo 079 esocracha jhaénapalo,

“And so this has the advantages cf Jhan.” § 76. Some of the unclassified consonants are occasionally found doubled, as ए and v; but when v is doubled, it is represen-

ted by double bd: as:

१६.8७ १ 1

dubbuttan from du vuttuin, “Speaking evil.”

THE NASAL SYWBOL ANUSWARA § 77. When followed by either a consonant or a vowel, it is

ovcasicnallv elided 3 as

20990903 2208 ॐ tasanunsantike from ftdsan ahan,

“In the presence of these females.” sa§oo20go980008 = $9 {000099880005

ariya sachchana passana from ariya sachchanan dassanan, “Seeing the Ariya truths § 78. When followed by a vowel, the vowel is occasionally e- lided ; as

६ > ह ०22 ag dhanyanva from dhanyan iva, “As paddy.”

§ 79 When a vowel has been elided, if the next consonant be double ss, it is changed to a single s; as: - @ ¬ © ५) 0 [८५ 0392 १ १६.०००२९&० & pupphansd uppajat: from pupphan assd, ‘Flowers are to her. § 80. When followed by e, sometimes, or y, or h, it is chang-

ed to ny; as:

9»

0०220 023 CO panyeva from tan eva “Even thee.” @ © क ad ws eo ~> AB sanyultan frcm san yultan “Union.”

८०९ ८९ ५8

1८/१7 20 = cvan ht, “Tf 80."

82 Anuswara before a Consonant.

§ 81. When followed by a vowel, anuswara is usually chunged to m3 as:

6029302008 ८०2०४ ग eld

konutwamasi from konu twan asi, ‘Who art thou?” Roodimequyod B &५2 ०००००२०७ himahankareyyami from kin ahan kareyydmi,

“What may I do?”

028259399 OQ श *MCHBR tumichchhatthesu from tun ichchha _atthesu,

‘Tun in the signification of wishing.” Slsagga 5 229

ल from ddnan uttaman, “The best offering.”

(००००3 € €09 evamelan from evan etan, “Thus this.”’ § 82. Occasionally it is changed to d; 88 (0०80616 €> 920061}@ ९६००८९८. from etan dvocha, “This he said.”

§ 83. When followed ky a classified letter, anuswara is changed to the nasal of the class to which it belongs; as:

€०08 € ©)

evangkho from evan _kho, ५८8० indeed.” ८2 009 ©

gahanycha from = 04147 eha “And a house.”

०००2० ०2485 8 tatiyamp: from स 102, “And the third time.” (१3३००७० cB’ 30060

kinndémo from kin TEM), “What name?” 29963,600009 993 (> ०५००2०१ sukhante hotu from sukhan te hotu,

‘May happiness be to thee!”

मि णि ciel

CHAPTER III.

TABLES OF DECLENSION.

Occidental grammarians take a word as a basis, and make all the particles of inflection radiate from it, as from a centre, but Kachchayano pursues the opposite course. He usually takes an in- flection and makes all the varieties of nouns masculine feminine and neuter, adjectives, and pronouns diverge from that inflection as from a central point. Thus he gives s as the mark of the ge- nitive singular, and then, in the tenth of his noun aphorisms, says

DOIWMSCICSDO sékamose “On account of 8, 50 comes,”

That is, the original single 5 of the genitive is doubled, and becomes ssa. He next illustrates the use of the suffix by the fol- lowing examples:

१५१००००० ॐ{2ॐ | Bagiaso «= 20009,[000

ptrisassa aggissa bhikkhussu sayumblussa “Ofaman, of a fire, of a priest, of a divinity, 8००2०१2० ago &28०2०

abhibhussa dandissa 15754

of a god, of a pilgrim, ofa sage.

In continuation of his making sa the central point, his next aphorism is: DODOICIQIOO १०८९ san sd swekavachanesu cha

८५.130 on account of san, sd, in the singular number.”

He adds the following examples:

cBoos eddo00 9805 भ62००ॐ Bord

etissun etissa amissan imissa tissan

In this of this in this of this in that ५8००9 0०००8 9०५०8 9०५ 292

{८554 tassan amusan amussé (All feminine. ) .

of that, in that, in this, of this. The following tables of declension contain all that can be glean-

ed from the the whole of Kachchayano’s examples. 5

34 Piru, and Ripa declined. Nouns.

First Declension. Sing. Plur. | § 89. Masculines ina, like purisa A MAN.

५6५०००० ५६००

Nom. putriso purisa ११०० ५६००० Ace. ptrisan purise Qkeoo9 - ५१०००५६ ५8०००५६ e003 Ins. purisena ptrisehi purischi ptrisebe १९००० == भविन 7. G. purisassa purisénan १६००० १६०2०५० 401, purisasmad ptirisahmd (as Instrumentive.) १६०००. g§o0§ १६१०००० १९१०००० Loc. = 056 ... smin ... sahmi purisesu purisdésu ११० gAooo Voc. purisa purisa (as Nominative.)

§ 90 Neuters in a, like réipa AN IMAGE.

qo Qos gd

Nom. riépan rupant rupa

Acc. (as Nominative.) (as Nominative.) — १००१ 0.

Ins. १ ४००१८ | rupahr qos qols

D. G. rupassa rupanan QO°89

Abl. rupasma (as Instrumentive. )

१० १५।०२

Loc. rupasmin १410450

Aggi,and Dandi declined. = ` , 35

Sing.

Plar.

§ 91 Masculines in £ like aggi FIRE.

०

Nom. 0८04४ 909° Acc. aggin

999339

In. Ab. aggind

998.000 so8cso

D.G. aggissa aggino ००६

Loc. . aygismin

४०९, (as Nominative.)

BACGOOD 98 2 @

aggayo aggt

(as Numinative.) 30808

(3 agyt he

9०

०८४९८१४

cs

aggisu (as Nominative.)

$ 92 Masculincs in ४ like dandé aA PILGRIM.

sap

Nom. dandi sos SBS Ace. dandin dandinan

82

og

dand¢

ऽद ऽक:

dandz dandino

(as Nomin ative.)

83

In. Ab. dandind 4011010८ sqBooo ऽ ऽदः

D.G. dandissa dandino dandinan ऽ SB

Loc. dandismin dandisu sap

Voc. dandr (as Nominative.)

REMARK.

Clough has all the forms of the ablative and locative sing u- lar, and instrumentive plural given in purisa, § 89.

36 Bhikkhu, and Sayambhu declined.

Sing.

_ Pilor,

§ 93 Masculines in u, like bhikkhu a PRIEST.

Bog |

Nom. 0141004

Bagi Acc. bhikkhun

oBag\ so

222५० Bagy

bhikkhave bhikkhiu Boged 2303 bhikkhavo bhikkhu

(as Nominative.)

Bags

In. Ab. bhikkhund bhihkhuht 22212 222 0. G. bhikkhussa bhixkhtnan Bog 8" Bogyoq! bhikkhusmin bhikkhisu ४०९. (as Nominative.)

§ 94 Masculines in ४, like sayambhi A NAME OF BUDDDA.

20099),

Nom. sayambhiu

29009.

Acc. sayambhun

=, Lp? In, Ab. sayambhuna

D.G. sayambhussa

2000908)

> C ;) OO C 4 | 09029. © 2000969 sayambhuvo sayambhuno (as Nominative.) 200091103 sayambhuhi

D0009)||

gsayambh unan

29009 199

Loc. sayambhnemin sayambhisu Voce. (as Nominative.) REMARK.

Bhikkhawo, or bhikkhave, is written on the inscriptions bhikhapd

¢ 1 ८ एण a fac—simile reads (+ nearly the regular vo ©

Kanyd, ratti, and mati dechned. 37

Second Declension.

Sing. Plur. इ 95 Feminines in d, like hanyd A VIRGIN. ००229 ९,०2०००००ॐ (222> Nom. kanyd र्ण kanya 020 Ace. = 49/८४ (as Nominrtive.) _ ००९9०५० ००९००५8 ०228 In. Ab. kanydya kanyahe kanyabhi. 0299900 029098 D. G. kanydnan ०20 (29 (P0999 Loc. kanydyan kanydsu CYC to Voc. kanye (as Nominative.)

§ 96. Feminines in 2, like ratti प्राज्णः

०8 ०१९०००० aB a8

Nom. = 201 rattiyo ratit ratte 8 (as Nominative.) Ace. rattin ०8००० 83 ०682 In. Ab. rattiyd ratte ht rattibhe ०8६०० “1985 D.G.... rattinan १8००० १8६५5 q gay Loe. tee rathiyan rattisu § 97. Feminines im £, like mats wispom. ५७८3 ५८३०५०० Nom. matt matiyo ०५. (as Nominative,) Acc matin ७०८७५०5 ००१2 ५2८8 ८०83 In. Ab. matiyd matyd matthi m usbhi ०५५०० ५०35 +. matinan ०५२५८ ५००

1.06, matiyan matyun matisu $

58 Nads, dhenu, and vadhu, declined. Sing. Plar. § 98. Feminines in ४ like nadv a RIVER. 38 $8000 Nom. nade nailéyo 98 (as Nominative.) ^ ९९, nadin 9 8005 9803 38 In. Ab. nadtyd ++ १८८६..१ ८ 38005 783 D.G. ... nadinan 98005 8५८ २६ Loe. ap nadiyan nadisw. § 99. Feminines in u, like dhenw A cow. CO$ ००8८००३ = COR Nom. dhenu dhenuyo dhenu 008 ee Ne Ace. dhenun 9 8 GO 3009 ००३०६ Cos 10, Ab. dhenuyd | dhenuha dhenubhé GO ROO COR? D. ©. ... dhentinan ००९०० ००९५9 CO8D0 Loc. dhentiyan dhentsu

§ 100. Feminines in %, like vadht A DAUGHTER IN LAW. =

फी ०९८०-० ० Nom. vadhu vadhuyo vadhiu A — (as Nom native. ) ९९ ४०५४११४ ०९५०० ०९५६ 0903 In. Ab. vadhuyd vadhehe vadhubhi ०९० O@> D. G.... vadhunan ०९००० ०९५० ०९ञद Loc. ` vadhuyan vadhusw

Puma, bhagavd, and mana declined. 89 Third Declention.

Sine. Plur, § 101. Maculines in a increasing by n, like puma A MALE. ५१५० ५००८१३० Nom. pumd pumdno Qa Acc. puman (as Nominat’ve.) १५०५१ ५ ५१५००१८ १५००१ॐ In. Ab. pumano pumund pumdnehti pwmdnedhi Qooeo त Od D. ©. pumdno pum inan १५००९ ५१५८५. १५००२ QHD Vor. Sin. Loc. pumdne pume pumdésu pumesu (puman.)

$ 102. Masculines in @ increasing by ¢, nt, as biagavd A LORD

9900) 2900 क्क, 22062 Nom. bhagavé bhagavante bhagavanto 2०00 Acc. bhagavantan (as Nominative.) 9900009 ००००० ०900<# 9 In. Ab. bhagavatd bhagavanteht bhagavantebhi 900 0092 920000 D. G. bhagavato bhagavatan 29004 ०900 Loc. dbhagavati bhagavantesu (V. Sin. bhagavan.)

$ 103. Neuters in a increasing by s like mana MIND.

५३ ५१० 2

Nom. mnan mantnt mand Acc. (as Nominative.) (as Nominative.) ५१००२ ००१८ ५०१० 1१. Ab. manasa 11201111 manebhi ०802029 O73 D. ©. manaso mandnan

0908 CC® C92

e , Loc. 2120145८ mane MAIN SU (V Sin. mana, man.t)

40 Athi, dyu, and bhdtu declined. § 104 Neuters in ६, like afhi A Bonz.

28 ००६९ ७०4

Nom. athi ध athini athe s0§

Ace. athin (as Nominative.) s0859 DGB 96

In. Ab. athind aththi athibhi ges ००६5

D. ©, athino athinan

9०45 mG ००९०१ 0९. (षाम athismin athisu § 105 Neuters in u, like dyu ace.

5109 slog$ = sdlun “Nom. dyu ayuni dyt 0]09° Acc. dyun (as No minative.) 9510999 9०048 gdlug08 In, Ab. dyund ` dythi dyubhi 951५103 9)0 73 0. G. dyuno dytinan नपृ ००।५े* sdluzag Loe. dyuhmt = dyusmin — (7 |

9 106. Masculines, or feminines increasing by r. (a.) Like bhatu a 2707 ४४,

(9/9 (ॐ । 9 (9/9 । ०2 -090€2 Nom. bhdid phataro 99309 ¢ Acc. bhdtaran (as Nominative.) 29202०2 2950>>98 9090908 In. Ab. bhdtard bhatarehi bhatuhs ००००१०१० 3290292 0003 ०१ +. G. bhdtuno bhdtardnan —....tdnan ~— tunan 41. 332८025 24 (as Instrumeniive.) 905009 ०2०००००९

Loc. 2104101४ bhdtaresu

Satihu, pitu, aud matu declined.

(b.) Like sattha is TEACHER,

99939

Nom, (स - ० Ace. satthéran ॐ> > In. ^ mo ard: eo) OOHRS y व). G. 5/८ sattinmno Loc. ° satthure

(^) Like pitu a FATHER. 80०29 Nom. pita 4 224 pitaran 60262 In. Ab. nitard

९०१५ । 27८1८५४

Ace.

Soqcso ७० 1). G. pituno pitu 6००५ Loew = pitari

Ci.) Like watu

22 Nem. mdtd ©0004 Ace. miétaran Q0099}9 In. Ab. matura O09 ~ ¶~ @-OF D. (>. ^^ weer ५०००१ Loc. midtare

eqa

4}

sattharo | 222०4 90099

8८८६16८0 =` satthare soggecqu3 saggpeqod ` sultharehi 5८८८/ ८००९0 909904193 ` “भै satthirdnan satthéuan

००९8००२

sattharesu

680०6०2

pitaro

(as Nominative,)

७००००५८ pitarchi ` 6७०००23 pitardnan

००००५24

pitaresu

A MOTHER,

QoOdsS 6)9 mataro ०.2 ०न]> 11410710 ८०००८०८ madtarehi. O0026)9$ matardnan 20D <} OG

matarest

80933 pitubhe 80005

22 { dian

०७] matare ५००००५१ ॐ matarebhi ceools ५००१४ mdtdnan mdtunen ०९ O27 1: ८११८९१८

[आ a

` 42 Sakhi, rdjd, and go doclined. Irreguisr WNeuns § 104. Mascalincs, in t, like sa.hi a शषः

225) 99912009. Nc 3 Nom.: = 5०८ ०८६ /24/0 vaxhdno

1 #

903 a0015 2०८९ Ace. sakhan gakhanan eakharan

(as Nominative.)

| ‰ 22४) acs In. Ab. ०0 .. etkhdreh: ` - sukhebhe 08000 — ooslgns ० D. G. sakhissa ,- eakhdrénan sakhinan 29 2००।००}2 3०००२९१ sakhe sakhdresu eahheeu 9

299 008) 208 208 Voc. sakha sakhd sakhi 9929

(८७ N

minative.)

§ 108. Mascalines im d, like rdjé 4 KUNG.

CPad CPaI | >> कत Nom. १५४६ raja १८१९० ॐ" ISH ००२०२ Ace. rajan raja , ¶का ` | "एफ न>... ०००० PQS In, Ab. rajend —s_ ranyd शुष rajebhi ` , raja 8०० १०९ ° PODS नके 7. ©. 74४० ranyo , ranyan rdjanan, rajunan १०८ PBR ००२ oe gay Loc. ranye ray ine rdjesu 74) ४०४८ § 109. Masculines in 0, like go awn ox. on =. = ` ` 6196) ०न्लो 68 Nom. go 9८०० १५८० gare

18 Od 616] ` 08; Acc. = gdvan gavan gdvun 4४८१९ ` (7१ Nominative.) `

6} ००० ` ©.) edic8

In. gdvena. -gavena - ` goht aodhi 10223 06239 ` 5015 0D D. © adearca 177:2350. - GoNan 0०८९ न # ry Tol od} | Abi. na" Cad (९० Tuetrumentiva.) Los are Gave go: & ¢ ^5€ 24 007 ("लने {6 `

Sabpe doclined.’

ves § 110 Of first aud second deciensions, as sabpa ALi Sing. lur (a.) MASCULINE DOCKS DOHSOOD OCH a Nom. sabpo sabpuko sabpe & og" र Acc. oabpun (as Nominative.) 2०0१ sagcnan 22० ००० Ins, abpena sabpaso sad eabpebe Hao | 3०० 2०१ ०००22 D.G.- sabpussa sabpescnan sabposan DIBIVO ००५33 Abi. sabpasma = salpato (as Instrumeniive.) ०० ०००६१ Loc sabpueme । 8.) Famine. ॐ | ¬> 43०59 33222 Nou. न्ध | . wa | 4 208 _ Acc. ७2272१६ = ` (as Nominative.) ०23७० = doegu3 ००० ॐ In. Abl. sabpdya ८ sabpehi ` -sabpebhu ~ । 9089099} = 908990 7. ©. sabpdya । sabpasdnan sabpdsan

299900 अऽ 009994 1.५९. 5०९६९ 09008 8८210469

(८) NEUTER

| ०० ००४०९ कष ७.23. su bpa n oe 622087२ ०० 20 908 Acc. 39 bpa id sabpani 209 2० ००६8 Vor. ००.५०५ = - sabps s@opant

(Lhe other ५.२ of the deubar are th3 sam2 as ths masouline.)

44 Gunara deslined.

§ 111. Adjectives of third, second, and first declensions, as ०५९०८४८ POSSESSING GOOD QUALITIES. Sing. Plur. (a.) MASCULINE.

Qemol = „~ 09; GEDOCHD ^ OB

Mom. — guuavd guravantd guravanty ` guravaniéa Qero 3, ०००५४;

Ace. guruvantan gunavante ०५००००० — ve OCR

19. Ab. guaavatd guravantent

| ५८०००००० . ` = 2338 „^ ©OD

D, G. ` gunavato guravantdnan guravatan ००५ sae OCHOY

Loc. gun ivati | guravantesu iO asl aa ©

Voe. gunava gunarvd gunavan (as Nominative.)

(b.) FEMININE.

५००९ „. ००8 ०००९०५०० „. of,

Nom. gunavanti guravati guravanttyo guracanis wwe OB, | Acc, gunavantan (as Nominative) „^ ०3.०2 ox In, Al. gusawantiyd .. s gunavantthi Geo< O06 095 D. © eos ~" ५५००५००५ ८२0१४ veo ०९3 ave °> Lec. ए guaavantiyan 9८०००१४४. -

(c.) . NEUTER. ००० ००० Ros

Nom gunavan ` gunavantane ०१०० Ace. gunavantan ^ । (as, Nominative. )

(The other cases of the neuter are the saine ap the masculint.) |

Pachan declined.

45

Participles.

Participles increasing by ¢, nt, as pachan COOKING,

Plur.

(a.) MASCULINE.

§ 112. Siug.

(8 COz39 Nom. = pachan pachunto

COS, | Ace. packantan , .

(^© >ॐ‡ Coord Ins. pachantena pachata

CORR CO.0DD D. ल. pachantassa pachato

COZGI CODD Abl. 1 pachata

| puhantasmé Op 19,932

० >& ५८८

1.06. pac Bre pachati

pachantahmi pachante

(9.) cok.

CO39

packanta

CO “FH

pachante

C0733 coag.08 pachanteht pachantedbhi: COZDS (09 pachantanan pachatan,

(as Tnstrumeitive.)

CO7gNY

pachantesu FEMININE. (९, ०५०० ocd. णी [1 pucnuntt yo ८८५०८५८४

(as Nominative.)

0. ८५९.

pachan tt he pachiun bhi cos |

pachantinan

GO YQ

pachantesu

(८) NEUTER.

Nom. pachant¢ ^© ००. Ace, = pachantin ०९९०9 In. Ab. pachantiyd eqe D. अ, „. COZOS Loe. pachantiyan (४ Nom. ०102 oo 3 Ace. vente ten

COP,

pachin te

(as Nominative.)

(The other cases at the neuter ave the same. as. the 41२१८१12.)

8

~. Eka, dwi, and ti declined. Numewal Acjsctivor. § 413. ५ one. Mas. Fem. Neut. 222 (33 COD Nom. eh eka chan COD COD | Ace. €/-02४ ekan. (Other cases like the C20) CONDQ3 masculinc.) 103. 71 ८4 4:/@ CONDO oa 70. G_seehkagsa. C€O909933 CODSODD ,, Abl. ekasa ekato cons ss Boe. elLasmdt § Elf. Dwi two, of all genders. Nem. @ ^ duve ~ x | १०८० Av duayan gos 171१. 1/0 dweayena 83 82009 D. G. duinnan durinnan 8 38 i Abl dwihi 808 Loe auie 8०} § 115. 4४; varne. , Mas. Fem. Neut. 0०५५-9 20009 Bak © No. Ag. tayo tieso ८.28 In, Ab. 17 10 ( (41/८९ cases ag

५ ५ Bape ०००

१ १,.५.१ + # 1) 1. (९. Hinman binnan {70119011

Boy

(7.

a4

tiecAnnai ‘on Me BQ

1.52

Teel Sead YY) ©. y

Chatu, panycha, ekunavisati, and exungsata declined. ay

Mag. ८3. No. Ac chattéro ९०१५३ In. Ab. chatuht

£093

प. G. chatunnar

८०२ब्‌

§ 116. 67५४ Four

Fem. Nent.

| € {0550 chattart

९०१५

chatuhi (Cther cases as ` €090009 $ masculine’ chatassanai

©0929

Lee. chatusu chatusu

§ 117. Panycha Five. of all genders. No. Ac. panycha Opp

४ aa ९ ~~

§ 118. Ekunavisati NINETEEN, deglined in the feminine, bet of all genders. Nem. ekunavisatt

In. Ab. panychaht D. G. panychannen

Loc. panychasu

८०२१९००९ ८०३१8००५. ८०२४ 8००५०५०2

1.06. ` ae —satiyan ००७

„^ ९९. ekunavisatin

Ts. Ab. D. G. ekunavisatiyd

$ 119. Wkunasefa wisety nine, declined in tke neuter, but of all genders.

No. Ac. ekunasatan

८०२१००० 178. ekunasatena ८०२१०००००१ D. G. ehunasatassa COQ30000 29

Abi, ehunasatesiné —satahmd i il pie ‘ = = 1 oe E ॐ ^ OD

,, , ,. ` (०१० = —B00dg9

dice. 111 स 11 ॥

८०२१०००० = —oom§ ८०११००००

Voe. ekunasata `

48

` $

Acc.

In. Ab,

D. G. Loe. |

Ahma, anit tuhma declined.

Pronouns. 120 The First Personal Pronoun ahma I. | ॥ Singular. ahan 7 3 man minan & ५८. ` mayd = me ८22 CO

+ mama me maman oo Co od ००९ wd ५५

कन्दा mahyan mayyan

mayd ८2) way? ५०८8 Plural

ahms ahman ahmanan N2g ००८ ००५९ ८9८5 C59

mayan

ahma ahman ahmanan 8०० 29 9नद के BQoco

ahmdkan no or ahmehi no ०००५५ [^ re ahmdkan NO 9०29 ¢ qo ahmesu |

०००५०

§ 121. Tre Second Personal 2767009 tukma THOU.

8.7 2101181 Nom. twan tuvan tuhman of 5 02 009 202 toayd tuyd 8 १ 9 2 = ‘Ace. fwan tuvan tavan OR O29 O29 Or Ins. tayd te 2५223 2 D. ©, tava te tuhman tuhyan mo € 029 ०१५६ Abl. tayd ~~ = Loc. tayt tuayt ००५९ ६८8 Plural Nom. tuhme tuhman °° vo ०२०५ ०१५ | col Ace. tuhme tuhkman tulhmakan vp ०१०५ ०१4 ०१८०० ©) Tn. Ab. tukmelic a ae ०१८५८ col 1). G. tudkmdkan ` , -‰ | 7 ०१५०००० CQ div. tuhmesu |

०१०५०

Ta, na declined.

§ 122. Tie Third Personal Pronoun fa nq BR, SHE, IT; 31 THIS, THAT, THR.

so demonstrative

49

Singular, Mas. Fem. Neut. ॥ 29 22 3 3 Nom. sa ad fan nan 03 3 03 $ am ॐ Ace tun ११४ tan nan tan nan COO? ^ >? >¬ 300 Ths. {९2५८4 १८९५८८८४ tay naya ( Other cases ©0000 $209 02000 0990905 १८०८५५९.) Yr $ । mee Lae 42 4००9 62५००94 ५० OD39 ~< $ -2 tay tasad 7854 tissdyd (८५० P99 02032 0232093 pooo Abl. tusind tahmé nasmanahmd tdya nya hifo 0008? 0०9 0०५8 09200 09228 ८2०25 १ 39 | Lae. 1८८ (110५५ ८4 2215720 taya tassan tissan nahine Plural. 002 C$ 02 $ 029९ Nom. te ne td ng tdéni COD oy OD9 कै 0232 Ace te ne ६4 nat Lunt 90008 ro pteee) (Other CHAIN

008 0228 3008 9008 S903, 009.

In. Ab. tahi tabhi nahi ndbhi 00223 0090903 ७०2 68093

९००२

{८6

८१ 2Q

Lee. UO.

tdhi, tébhi ndhi nabhi

02929 0222298

D. G. tesan tesdnan nesan wesdnan tésan

tdésdnan . GOIDQ C2959 dae {५०५ tésx |

50 Ela declued.

§ 125. The Demonstrative Pionoun evo Tus, THAT.

Sing. । णः (a.) MASCULINE. - | ०००2 €~ Nom. eso ele > : <> Ae. = ८८८८८ ete (०००३ ८०००५ Ins. etena etehi ८५. (€> ९००2० D. GG. etizsa 4 elesan. | | (न , ` &८248 ^ 01. ` ` लवन | 1/1 ८ cosy ` Ce Loc. etasntue =` | ८४८९५ ` `“ 24 ५ ५.) | FEMININE, — C509 ॐ Nom. ead | ` ` €3 ८८3 Ace. ९४ eta ` ` &०००५० ९०००५ In. Ab. etdya , ९1५८ ~ ` (€००५० (५०००० ८2०2209 ` ` ॐ

ए. G. etdya etisss etissdya ९4७९ cova §=¢03003 &०>ॐ०>प्‌

Loc. efdyan etissan etasu

(८.) NEUPER.

co3 , Nom. = etan . ९८/६४

COS ` ` ` ` । 6०2०९ Acc. etan ~ “ : etdni

The cther cases of the neutex are the same us the masculine.)

Ima declined. § 124. The Demenstrative Pronoun ima ars.

Sing. | Plur. (a.) MASCULINE. 9०८9 ६< Nom. ayan ११८९ 8५ &<० Acc. ‘man ame 8९} =८‰$ ६५०५८५४ ८५ Inq, meine ८११८१८८ - ` ` 2071८14४ cha g72009 &&००० 9900 @cwsi scans D. G. tinassa - ५५८58 == aesa = imesan 2011552४ | REM BAW ६५५० ६०५५४ ८५ 40. imasmaé asma — imuhind tmeht ehi © ^> क प ROG’ 008" ध" oF 8०००९ coq Loc. imasniuin asmin ssmin imahmi imesu ९

(९.) FEMININE,

` 9५७ | ` BOD Nom. ayan | Inu 2a S200 Ace. = tman व ima $2009 GCOS In. Ab. imdya | ४४१४०/४८ 209 &‰&-८ॐ>

६००००५०० 92०92 26023 000003

D. ©. imaya imissd imissdya assd imdsan tumisdnan 0003 98008 ०००8 @eong

Loc. imndyan imuesan assan. smdsu

(¢.) NEUTER. Se 48 ROOF 1 Nom. tun ‘amani : 6 ८24 | 8 ध ६५० Acc. dan Imani *

(Lhe other cases of the neuter are the same as the masculine.)

ॐ

estat

(The uther cases of the neuter are the some as the 2०१८११८7.)

a

Plur.

95९0295

ameksdinanr

००००००१

amiusdnan

52 Ame declined. $ 129. The Demonstrative Pronoun amu THIS. ° Sing. (a,) MASCULINE. 9० ने ०229 अत्न 92 222 ०० फ Nom. amuko asu asuke amu RQ RE Acc. amun ant 996,90 ००५५ In. Ab. amund amiubht ००५ 200 Bad D. ©. amussa 1.८ 1111] „ ०५ <म्‌ Loc. amusmtin emiisu | ४.) FEMININE. DAC WAZ WACO Nom. amuko asu amuyo ०५ 9०6 ०५०० Ace. amun amuijo 9०००9 ००५५४ In. Ab. ०१04 amuhi GQGQI 99q9009 GI D.G. amuyd amugsé amisan ००५५० WAS Bq Loc. amuyan amussan aintsw | (c.) NEUTER. Ty a8 Nom. adun ` amun i ° TQ c 9०१ ? Ace, adun amunt

Yu declined. ms `$

§ 126. The Relative Pronoun-ya wHo, THAT, Wich, प

Sing. Plur. (५) MASCULINE. ८0-3 0322722 COO Nom, yo ५० ye ^) ९02 Ace. = yan | ८ : >. ०८०० 13. Yona ५२५८८ 02239 | 025 - 03339 D. G. YARB ieserin yesedsertst 00230 20003 Abl १/०९११ ८८ yehe 3 & ०५०० Loc. = yasmen 2५६१८

(2.) FEMININE.

OOD OOD Nom. 2/४ १५८६ oe (22 Acc. 10, yeh 00900 022 In. Ab. yaya yas 00000) 02224 0८23095 D. G (1/1 71 | १ ८८६९८100 /(८५६५८८/५। 09205 ` 00999 1.20. = 2८४८-४ १५२५

ह (८.) NEUTER,

OS s 80% Nom. were ; 1/4 L | OS ~ 0०2९ । Ace, yan णा]

my र ५ 5 in al? (Tice ८.1. retecet af the 1८“ (८८१ are the 5211८ as the the erties)

10

.

Kin declined.

#127. The Interrogative Pronoun

S¢ Sing. CODD Nom, ko (3 “Ace. kan | ०८००१ Ins. kena CD59 D. G. kassa

YY) 239 Abl. hasme

(“यः Loc. kasziniu

C9 Nom. ka

(2 Acc. kan

(32 In. Ab. kaya

(>) D. G. kayo

(2232390 Loc. kaya

3° Nom. kin

(20 Ace. kev

(Phe other ensee of the neuter are the sane as the masculine)

(a.) MASCULINE.

GOD

ke

GOD

ke 6202 16/4८ 00222 168८77. monies hehi GOD ~

AES

(b.) FEMININE. (2722 ha D9 14 294 1.11 2229 késan (9909 26४

९८.) NEUTER. ang [1/7 0224

kani

Plur.

0029925

hesdnan

(0908 kdsdnan `

it WHO, WHICH, WHA.

Doclension of the Insoriptions.

Rock-cut Deolension. § 128: As First Declension in final a. (८०) MASCULINE.

Singular. Nom ff jano & man Acc. D¥ 1 dhamman the law

¢ x

In. 0 | dhammena dy the law. D. ©. DY Av dhammassa of, or, to the law Lo. 0 dhamma im thelaw? | SE AY vijitehm? in the conquored [oountry j SEKd प्ट | 9०८. + ६4 . र्दन - © king’s follower! । Plural. Wom, JEP = vajakd king’s followers 408, fy re e 4 त ty pafevesiyshi by neighbours DG. YL vie moanusénon to, or, ef men 2.08, ly © a pathaes = य the paths (6) MBUTER, Singolar. ‘Nom. + 1 U dy © anuposathan the Buddhist Sabbath

© ^+66. dy १ sukhan pleasure | Plaral, = Nom. 4 । milani roots

Ace ७५. — gharistdni housebolders

* 56 Declension cf the Inseript’ons. ६

§ 129. As Setoad Deciension FEMININE.

| Singular. Nom. ¢A+ jatuké ५ ४२ 4 „~ In. 4. [> A ५ ९८४ by, or, from thi3. + ¬ , ~ D.G. 4 1] ddichhantyé to, or, of a २3645. - Loe. FAA iM tusaliyan in Tosali 8190. As Third Dectension—MASCULINE. | ` Singular. Nom. |६ पक * a king In. {7 १५४४ | by a king DG. | ऋ ranyo to, or, of a king Abl. 1 { mukhato from the moat + 9 ee 4 me ॥ 1.4९. YA} pitare ina fuSier | ` Plural. Nem {६ व 4० ` kings § 15. As thé numeral Two, * Nom. 9 423 dwe duva two © 4 ‘ ^ = A Ins. १५८ ducehi by ४५९. § 132. As the First Personal Pronoan I. Singalar. Nom. # 3 ehan 1

Ina, ६ Bo, me mayd by me = ‘ ५. ज 29०

0. ©. ¥ 4 £ me mano to, or, oF mes my

www + = नन्--

CHAPTER. IV.

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

The Pali has three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter; and two numbers, singular, and plural. It differs from the Sans- krit, as the Latin differs from the Greek, in the absence of a dual number.

The Vali, like the Sanokrit, bas eight cases, the nominative, the accusative, the instrumentive, the dative, tho ablative, the ge- nitive, the locative, and the vocative. The instrumentive and loca- tive, unknown to Groek or Latin, express relations denoted by by, and ir.

In Greek there are three sets of terminations to mirx the dis- tinctions of case. and hence three dezlensions; in Latin there are five, and therefore five declensions. Kachchayand gives one set cf terminations, so according to his grammar, Pali 193 only one declens:on. The native Sanskrit grammarians also give a single set of case terminatiuus, which are here furnished fer comparison.

§ 138. Kachchayano’s case te:m nations.

__ Singular. Plural. PALI, SANSKRIT. PALI. SANSKRIT. 8 fa 0०9 जस Nom. 81 81 yo JAR ० wa ८०2 श्स. Ace. AN aM yo SUAS ॐ at ५5 भिस Ins. NA TAL 11 ४185 9 90 = ६ We Dat. 84 NGE NAN BHYAS 930 ofa B we Abl. 891६ NGASL Wl BHYAS e 2 Fa 3 अम्‌. Gon. 84 NGAS NAN AM 9 ॐ रि 39 मुप. Loe. अभास Ne SU SUP

11

38 Firsi Decensicn.

The vecative is not considercd Ly Fackchaysno, nor by the native Sanskr.t grammarians, an j1.d¢ pepdent care, but as included in the nominative. ;

These terminations’ unaltercd are nevor fuund attacked to any roun. Ai, for instance, is elways rejected from the nomirative, and scme other affix substitutcd. In Sanskrit tle 7 of Si is १८ jected together with j, sh, t, «9, p.* By writers leter than Kach- chayano, each changed set of terminations has been erected in- to a separate declension, and hence fifteen deciensions have been furnished for Pali nouns.

In the preceding Tables of Doclensiun are given all the dil ferent forms of Pali nouns, adicctives, and pronouns; and an ¢x- amination of them will show, that they may Le all conveniently classed under three declensiors. | |

Mascniine and nontfer nouns in a final, § 89. 90, furnish ore well marke. eet of terminations, and may be comyared with the Fanskrit as below

§ 134. Nouns in a final. (1) Masculine.

Singular. Plural. 2 sa 4 ~ 3 PALL SANSKRIT. PALI. . SANGKWIT. ~~) ‡ 2 | ¢ Nom. 0 au A Au ° ` ˆ» ¢ म. 80. ~ -N | E । Ax - ०५ | cS -- C—> न 6६ 638 202 ` 8. ` EXA ENA PHI xEBHI AHI AIH e ~ eae Ta 29 ~ भ्यः Dat. . SSA AYA ANAN ` EBHYAL ae > 43 Td | : Abl ua uMmA Ar (as Ine.) (a8 Dat.) (491; ` (^ Dat) SYA (as Dat.) tnaNn ~ 3 ~~ a“ ५० & ॐ Coy = ष Loe, ४ न्ना satin ष ४ Agu ` ae Mm 0 - F Vor, ५ 4 A (as Nom.) (es Novi.)

ma - - -- eee wm ee

*See Yates’s Suns' rit Crammar, page 469.

Compared with Sanskrit. | 59

(४.) Nouns in a finel; Neuter.

Singular. | Plural. ` Pali. Sanskrit. Pali. Sanskri! 9 ° , Nom. ५ N , ANI AN. ® 9 OR नि Acc. N N ANE | | कषा ¢ : OS: ` अ. oo. oo <> ८ ५८. म ८ “Oo. SMIN hI SMi इनि, mosh usually sy are ail

found in manu:eripts in Burma, for the locative singula

While there are many pvints cf resemblance, it will be 5८९1 that the differences Letween Pili end Sanskrit are very cons:der- able. In the mazeuline singular toey avree in the accusative, ia- strnmentive, genitive, one ferm of tlhe loeative, and one form of the १८८८१९९. In the plural they are ucarly alike in the ablative, genitive, end one form of the locative ; and in the nominative, and accusative singular and plural of the-neuter they are identical.

In other instances however they differ wicely. ~ In Pali the ehlative plural is the s:me’as the instrumentive,- while in Sanskrit it is the same as the dative, from which it differs in Pali; and the dative aud geuitive, both singular and plural, era the same in Pa- li, while they differ in Sanskrit. Stork* makes the dative and genitive in Pali to differ, and gives dya in this declension for the Cative singular, identical with the Sanskri$; but this is correct on- ly asanexception The rule is that dya marks the dative sin- gular of feminine forms, but not masculines; and the declension which has d@ya for the cative makés the genitive also in aya.

Kechek:svano hov.ever in the 58th rule cf his Second Book, gives rome exceptions, in winch after bases in a@ nenter, .the dative sincular 13 meds by @a3 but on'y when signifying for. These ex- ceptions Kachehayano illustrates in the following sentence

०० 72०५०, (02209, ०१४५० ¢800300008, Yosh

६.८ द८८ २६५८८, vaya, ` 52८14, 11711 170 1 1/1, 02 ~> ०&< {८1.2 १८२९} (८1८

—

क =+ === ~~ ~= +~ ee

“See "५1८4 दव PALIC specimen alterum,” page 7.

60 ` Becond Declension.

os

“Por the wel being, forthe advantage, for the happiness cf men aud devas, Buddha was manifested in the world.”’

The correzpondences between the Pati and the Sanskrit de- clina tions though more numerous, are not mor: striking, than the correspondences between tke Pali and the classical languages.

In all the maseuline declensions in Greek, $ is the firal of the nomimative singular, and according to Kackchayxne, a? was the original form in Pah. The neuter nominative singular, both Greek and Pali, is marked. by »; and all the accusative singulars it Greek end in 7, and so they doin Pali. The genitive siuzular of the third declension in Greek is os, in Pali it hero 13 55०, and originally sa in Kachchayano’s table, and on Asoko’s inscriptions The genitive plural always ends in on in Greek, and in Pali al- ways in an. So the mark of the Latin ablative plural ‘dus, has its counterpart in the Pali ८१८.

The feminine forma cf § 95—100 furnish a second clearly characterizad declension. Tae terminations are given below.

§ 135. Nouns in did ४ ४ feminine.

Singular. Plural. Pali. Sanskrit. Pali. Sanskrit. GOOD याः Nom. 4 11 ए 6 Attia Yo । य ॥ GOOD साः Ace. N N YO YAH ५ ०2 FT ०2 ॐ fa: Ins. ya 74 ए प्रा BHI LHL @.e ७४ ये कफे ग्धः Dat. २ sae Yal NAN BHYAH [हि 8 । 1 1 थाः Ab}. oe Ge raul (es 715.) (as Dat.) eee coe ee : AT Gen, ... aps (as Det.) NAN oon ७०५ OO at YQ । सु षु Loe. Lee VAN १५४ Bu BU. GHU ~ ` GC

Yor. BE Ke, r &e. (as Neots.) (6४ Nem.)

Third De ("775 (021.* 61

The five oblique cases of the singular are the same in Pa‘i; while they all differ in San-k-it, but the difference is only in the vowel, the consonant y 18 the principal pirt of the termination in both languages. In Pali wnen the base euds in 4) the y of the termination 11718 a sho-t, but when it eads‘iu any other vowel. tha a of the y is lonz, a distinct ow not mvle in Sanskrit. Toe Puli has # second form for the locative in yun, and this, it will be 8५९1 is ileatiesl with the Sinskeis form

The forms in इ 101—103. effo-d a third well deSnel declin- sion, in which the root, out of the nominative case, is inztevwel by a consonint, ike many nouns of the third dectension in Greek.

Sanskrit nouns that end in consonants.are disposed of, in Pali in two ways. One लो ४२ adds the vowel a to the consonant, ani then foYovs the First Dee easicn BIT dwar ‘a door’, in Pali

gic] dwar. In some instances, as मास gies, Pali 0990 mdsa, “a month” the San:krit has the Pali for. also, मास itch see

Another clas3 drops the consonant in the nominative case, bat introduces it in the oblique cases. Such are the nouns that ap- pear in § 101—103.

§ 156. Neuns increasing in the oblique cases.

Sinzuwar. . ` गोफ] † ` (` ` Sanskrit. ` Pali. Siunskrit 2 | Cao 1 Nom. A a | ` 0 AH [-, 0

Ace, N - ON (1s Nom.) (ai Nom.) 2 T ०५2 ०3 ` मिः he |

Ins. A

अः. EBHI RHUL : Dat ० K ANAN BHYAH Abl. (as Ins.) AU (a Ine.) =. + (as Dat.)

@ थ: । |

Gen, (as Dut.) ` (as Ab!) (as Dat, । । . $ . ५ Luc. षट + =. Est ABU SU

Voc. oN AoA (as New.) . (as Now), Gre Nw.)

cr Characteriaties cf the Declensions.

To Pati ~> 55) ‘Lord’, is UMA bhagaval in Sat skrit,” and - Qgy mana, ‘mind’ 000 in Sanskrit. Thev’ गै मनस |

be'ong to the class of nouns, denominated ty Max Miler, “Nouns: with changeable 08865." Thus ५०) pound, “a roale, has two bases,.

५० puma, and (८5 > pumdne. In Sanskrit tLis word has three:

buses qata पुम पुम pumana, pum, puns, and an +» is

found in two, “which dovs nov apyear. in. Pali, wl-ere it sign:fies male,” and not ‘‘man’’, as.sometimes defined in Sanskrit.

In: {111 declension. there is aco.er resemblance between the Pali and the Sanskrit, than iu the others, but there is a wide cif- ference in tho dative and genicive, The Pali too has more-forms- than the Sanskrit, especiatly the third declension In the sin- gulir the ab’avive has two different forms, the locative three, and. tte vo:ative two. In the plural it has three forms for the instru- mentive anl ablative, and two for the locative, while in cach case the Sanskrit }as bub one form. क

Were all the Pil nouns ccrmpr’s:d in the above three classes, the propric.y cf div ding tiem into three Ceclensicns woud be un- quesiioned, ond the dec leasicns might be distingut: hed, by the ge- nilive singular, as in Greek, thus

I Declension, genitive singular ends in 583. i ee sa YA Wt! ६ ञः 0

But there are ecveral other classes of nouns which it is not 20 clear What disposition had best be made of them. Thus mas- galines in 7, ¢ ५) ४, § 9I—84, occilate ketween the first and third declons.ena, like many objects in the kingdom of nature, which seom to eluim retationship withtwo families, standing where the

[1 ee ee oe

*Wilson ‘de‘incs भगदन bhajaran, “One of the ceneric titles . . e 3 a ~e “9 P भे oe of a Sine, or ८.५८ Aciaed sale.’ In Pali, 030} ९५५८५५५ de- wfincd as im § 102. with a secon] base 20 > = Lhagavate is ane oF the tides of (र udawa, and it is fuand tus Ceclined inthe inscription at Byrats, where it road

wot eee ane fi oA UD L Fv ^ bhagsreta lidihena ७.8

Ysa 8, gen by the Lor! Buiha

Hetervelites. , 69

two circles {ouch eeck other. Tkey mip ht be mede to constitute a separate declension, or they might be classed as a section of either the first or third. They are here placed in the first declension with which thay aziee in every ८.९९, In one form in which they are declined, excepting the instrumentive and ablative singular, and the. nominative and accusative plural ; and sometimes they are the sume in the ablative.

They agree with the third declension in mating the inatru- meniive and ablative in ठ, aud in having a second form of the da- tive and genitive singular in 0, bes:des the regular one in asa. They correspond to Hetercelites in Greek. When declined witb

the genitive singular in seu, they are of the first declension, but whcn they make it in 0, they are of the third. It ie only neccs- sary to noté that besides thg forms given in § 91-94, there are also fou:d: § 137. Redundant forms of masculines in 1, 4, wu, .té. (u.) Dative and genitive singular. {22 अक त्वज ००५॥-र२ aqgino dundino bhikkhuno seyambhino Stork gives o as the only termination of the genitive singu~ lar, in these ncuns, an] omits it in the dative altogether.*:

(8.) Ablative singular.

aBo90 क ॐव ०५1

aygqisma dandismd | bhikkhwsiad . — sayambhisind 5 5 3.99 2) Oo. 3 ०९६५० sq BLO 5 ॥५० , ८09८0 =» = dundihma bhikkhulma sayambhuhnea

In like manner many nouns of the third declension, hesides the forms given in the saradigma, § 101---108, have redundant forms in the singular conformed to the declension of: pus, § 89. For eximo'e; ११.५१, भत, वयप oa the bise mut, withous bie king «+ is declinet:

। i Munena = ` Dat. Gen. os =` neLREsRE

h ‘ मै 1) j 4 Abl. gy प्छ ५१५२ manasmeé = manah inva

on

क

eG न ----->-- -न*

*See “GRAMMATICE 24.1.1४ speciinea 95 --पा0,' page 29.

64 Nouns of relutionship.

§ 188. Bhagavd A LoR?, besides the forms given in $ 102, is also doclined, out of the nominative cage, on the base bhayavanta, like purisa of the first declension, thus:

Singular. Plural. 0206) 020074, 200089 Nom. bhagard bhaguvants bhayavuntd 2000.8, 090063, Ace. + bhagavantun. bhagavants DD00GRS 22005 = 200003, 18. bhagavantena bhagavautehe bhagavunutebri 92003909 00893 D. ©. bhagaruntassa bhagavantanen 30003,991 ००००‰# - All. bhagavantasmd ... vantuhmd (4s Instrumentive.)

9000308" Lee. bhagavantasmin. | m00a§ = 3900 2&, 2०00 <$.> bhagavantahmi bhagavante bhagavantese 206}. 3200 9006 Woe, bhagavé bhagava bhagavan =, = (च्ञ Nomiwatic:.)

Nouns increasing by 7, or that have a secon] base in which r appears, form a complete class ia themselves, and might be treat- ed as a Separate declension, but there seem3 to be.no sufficient rea- son for separating them from the third.

§ 139. Besides the forma given 10 the tab!es, certain nouns of agency are declined after the furm of satthu A TEACHER; as:

०० kattu A DOQER. ०८ vali A SPRAKER.

These noans have a redundant form of the dative and geni- tive singular in sea, like tle first declension, as:

satthuseau, toorof a TEACIIER. ॐ DOO १

| 1८534 DER : O2QR1999 katt d Sete 9 A DOR ६०३५० 11100550 वि ae, A FAIN BR. itu ... ... ^ लाप 202 matussa

- bhdtussu .. A BROTHER,

Peculiar Forms. 65

§ 140. Occasionally ‘the ablative singular is made by ito. as: 09032002 mdtito, from 4 MOTHER,

8R2009 pitito, ... ^+ FATHER,

WIBror) rétito, = + BROTHER, 8A 2232 dhttito, ... A DAUGHTER, 90303 201 duhitito, ... A DAUGHTER.

Cluugh declines mdtu A MOTHER, in the singu’ar number, on the model of the second declension, making the instrumentive, da- tive, genitive, and ablative, adtuyd*, but no such forms are given by Kachchayano, ani they have probibly been introduced into the language since his grammir was written.

In the Pali books the nom‘native plural is sometimes use] for the singular, as: :

००422०2 mayyan maro “My mother.” ००९००००२ tuhyan mdro “Thy mother.”

These nouns of re‘ationship in Sanskrit mike their fina's in a Tl, while the nouns of agency corresponi to Sanskrit

nouns made by the affix a tri. €

§ 141. There is so little diversity in the fem‘nine forms in § 95-100, that no exception can be taken to making them a sin- gle declension. The apparent irregularity of mati wispom is the re- sult of permutstion. ‘Tae final ४ of the base is elided, and the y of the affix is compounded with the last consonant of the base. So also, among others; । (66 ०५ ववषं HE EARTH, ati PLEASURE,with

goo ^ ocoyp §=cooyy नतद 40"

ya १४ 32973 puthabyd pathalyan = ratyd ratyan = « § 142. Many feminines in «# are formed by the affix nt be-

ing added to masculine, as: | |

2ॐ3( ०. , ०28 0028

bhiklchu A एर bhikkhuné A Paiestess 1 aN ELWOMANE (य

A FEMALE ELEPHANT.

*Clough’s Grammar, page 42. , 1

66 Vericas Irregularities.

Sometimes the Irst vewel cf tle masradine suffers cl axge be- {cre the effix 1s appended, as:

०० ८००१०००९

malula A MATARNAL URCLE malulani WiFEK OF UNCLE

00204 ०५००००९

gahapatt MASTER OF A HOU8E guhupatané MISTRESS OF A HOUSE 4 Ae s por o ५

62 १९/८६ & KING ०126 74/79 4 QUBEN

§ 148. Inthe Pali books, the masculine termination of the locative singular is rometimes added to the feminine form. Thus $8038 S008 niriyan and niriyahms ‘In heil.” are found on the same page. |

§ 144. Sometimes the lorg vowel of the termization yd is dropped, as

s00 Rvosan$gos

“The sixth, the division of the kings, is Enislcd.”’

§ 145. The irregularities of the irregular nouns are accoun-

ted for by supposing the existance of two or more bares. Some

— ehha kkaitiya hharda nithitan

cases are formed regularly fiom one base, end otler cases from the other base, or basce. Thus Sakhs 4 FRIEND, 1 as two bases,

508 299) sakhi and sakha.

Occasionally there are forms found from both roots in the same case. Thus the nominative and accueative plaral of sakhi, have both 2०४० 051699 sakhino and sakhéno.

§ 146. Brahma is irregular only in that it iccreases by 2, in some of its.cases instead of by », and has two tases,

(22 (Goren brahma and brahmara.

८

§ 147, Adi seraixnina, has irregular forms in the locative, which has the following forms

ol? 8B 8B wed

élin édshmns adismé ८470

§ 148. Kamma A DEED, anda few other ncuns, have a fcrm with uw in the instrumentive singular as;

870 kammuna @ 213 brahmuna “By a decd.” “By a Brahmin.”

Irregularities of the Vocatiue. | 67

§ 149.

10 the plural, the vocative is uniformly the same. as

the nominative, and most frequently has a form like it in the sin- gular, always in the tables, when the vocative is not given. But nouns that have a long vowel in the nc minative case, have also a second form of the vocative with a sl:ort vowel, as:

Nom.& 22061 ॐ} Qed E90 EB cog Voc. bdbhagavé bhata pumd स्ववं प ved 20० dod go 12099 &8 cog Voc. bhagara bhdta puna sattkha 2th vedu.

On the other hend neuters tl at mske the nominative singular in a final aruswara have a {01 of the vocative with a long vowel, as: Nom. qo ५5 vupan manan Voc qol 090 १४2 mand

§ 150. In most langueges the ncmirative case is regarded as the base of the noun, but in Pali, as in Sanskrit, the nominative case i» usually formed from the base, and differs from it like the other cases. Thus the lase zu7isa forms its ncminative puriso, and rupu makes rupan.

In forming compound words, the base and not the ncminative case is used, and it is the tere and not the nominative case that has to be Jooked up in Sanskrit dictionaries. A Pali dictionary might be appropriately com piled on tle 8६ € principle, Lut the ex- isting native Pali dictionaries insert the word in the nominative, and ignore the base altogether.

The root to which nouns are referred differ usually both from the nominative cese end tke Lace cn which it is declined. Thus Kachchayano derives

Soq ५) | ६०१ A FATHER, from 4 TO WATCH OVER, and the sffix rity @902Q O09 €)90Q natu A MOTHER, ऋध. TO LOVE, ratu

In this way most words are traced to a rcot and an affix, but many of the derivations are imaginary. The affixes used in the formation of words are very numerous, and will ccme under con- sideyatiin in a future chapter on derivation.

pity

——_--@-¢ @ —____

CHAPTER V.

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.

Adjectives are declined like nouns of the same terminations. Thus sabpa, (§ 110.) is declined, in the mascaline, like purisa (§99.); in the feminine like kamydé (§ 95); and in the neuter like vipa (§ 90.). So gunavdé (§ 111.), in the masculine is like bha- ७५४८४ (§ 102.), in the feminine like शवक (§ -98.), and in the neu- ter like mana (§ 103.)

§ 151. The affix vd, in gunavé, corresponds to Sanskrit वत

vat, and is used in the formation of many other adjectives, as

0८] balava POSSESSED OF STRENTH O oO) panyava as WISDOM Reo) himavd bas FROST AND SNOW

§ 152. Other adjectives, thus declined are formed with md in the same signification ; corresponding to ths Sanskrit pacticie

ad mat as:

~>) satimd POSSESSED OF CAUTIOUSNESSS १६५) ruchimd ... . LUSTRE

© aloo bandhuma ... RELATIONS

§ 158. Maha pear, is declined on the same model. Thus

the masculine singular is

Nom mahan maha ७८० (22 Ace. mahentan ५.० कै

In. Ab. mahatd (2232

70. G: 71411410 ©UD2009

Loc. mahati ones

_ § 154. Participles are १2५117९1 like adjectives of the same finals. In § 112. is a specimen of a present participle declined like gunavad. Many other participles and participial adjectives are declined on the model of sabpo, sabpd, sabpan; like the Greek pas, pasa, pan; or the Latin bonus, bona, bonum

Comparison cf Adjectives, 69

1631668 of Comparison.

Kachehayano does not distinguish the degrees of comporison, and they are often usel, asin San skrit, not-for comparison but to denote “excess.” Ciough say-,* “It does not appear that they can he distinguished into the two classes of ‘Comparative, and Su- perlative.”

§ 185. These remarks ave j 1511१61 by Kachchayano who writes:

0079 @20 Oldln 990092008 6525 8०५),

© ˆ | sabpe aime 1/1 LYATNLMN AS i visent papote छ) ¬ r-) “~ >] >) ¢ 01029 >92॥ & 6039 ०42॥ SIOBemon &)& 20091 papaturo evan pdhowiiny papisixa papityo

५)6०&2॥ ऊन | “Afl these are wickz1. Th's one of these by being exceed- ingly wicked, is wicked —tart, So also is wicked —tain1, wicked —isika, wicked—'y1, wickel—itha.” ६४०० goq &5> भ These particics givon by 2५५८1 १1110 a ove are the Sanskrit

S34. a0 ryits and ishtha, and siace Yates saya ft “Each of which may be comparative or superlative’, they muy be edinit- 1९0 as possessing the sume doable signi icat‘on in Pali. Kachchay.- no furnishes several eXamp’es, a3:

"209 0850००9 (४ . &

gunata VIRTUOUS = gunryo gurtho MIRE, ०८ MOST.VIRTUOUS CoOd ०५६८७०० cos<g9

medhd INTELLIGENT medhiyo medhitho MORE, or MOST INTELLIGENT

iya or 21/४7, isiku, or ttha

§ 156. Whatever grammurians may siy, usage shows thas fara designates the comparative १०४०६०७, and tama the supe. la- tive, a3 in Sanskrit and Greek. For example: King Wathandvria says of his Queen Mad,

032009 290०0००१ 09900006 6059 992020.

muhto == sutaryurena. — suhassassunen "1111 *Clourh’s Geammir, pigs 93. tYates’3 Sanskris Gram, paze To.

14

40 New Bascs Substituted.

~~> or > eco Fuo g | त~ DOB EQ OP” < OC OD¢} ssagumend sabjpanyutanyena mera piya tarants ‘Than Madi, by a hundred times, by a thousand times, Fy ten thousand times is infinite wisdom more beloved by me.” One of Kechchayano’s examples reads: 203 9088 8०००९०० 0०८० said ndrinan dassaniya tamo “Of women the one with a golden sppearance is the hand- £ 0111661." । § 157. The comparitive degree is often made by varan BET- Ter, and the superlative by ५८८८११८१ Best. The young wHe of am ०१ Brahmin is abused thus: ००० Bgpo0s ५००५ 00003 ५० Bos ०५ yatwan jinnassa = (7.7८ = ५८०८ 110८041 jintan varan “Thou who dwellest in the house of an old man, death to thee were better than life.” When Waythandria gave away his children, it is said:

slg न += 328) dana muttaman ada

“He gave the best gift.” § 158. When adjectives take ‘yo, ita, or rsika, a final vowel or affix is dropped asin Sanskrit. Thusin the examples given above

C09 6५० ००९०७०० ११९० becomes medha as medhiyo (909 gan = १८००० gunata see guna... guniyo

§ 159. In English a few adjectives, as good and dad; on bemg compared change the root, and become better best, and worse worst. So in Pali, as also in Sanskrit, when cya and ‘tha are affixed to certain a ljectives, they ti ke ncw beses, as;

eo Qoo ९‡3 ८१9०००० = op Seg antika = NEAR meda Cnew base) nediyo neditho

5० - con ` 0203009 - 098 ०& Cape SMALL hana oe kuniyo hanito

९४ 229 2०086७2० 2०2०809

` ४५५ FIRM sddlus ध sddhiyo sddhitho

Numerals. "1

Numeral Adjectives. | CarRpinaL NuMBERS.

§ 160, The Pali numerals resemble the Sanskrit, and the nu- nierals of all the Indo-Europeen nations ;yet there are points of difference throughout. In the large numbers they differ materially. There is no distinct name for a million, as there 18 in Sanskrit. . Jt is called ten hundred thousand. But there is a proper name - for ten millions, and then the enumeration proceeds by periods of sevens, every seven places of figures having a distinct name up to a unit with one hundred and forty ciphers.

In English, ten and one are expressed by eleven, one left after ten; so by an analogcus idiom, nineteen is expressed in Pali by eku- १८५४४७१ or twenty less one; and ninety nine by chwnagata, or one hundred Jess one.

© @emd cmd CM | € 1 eko eka ekan OWE (base) eka

J ¢g १०० g १०० £ १

2 dwe duve TWO dwa duve dwi duvi . २ ००००० © Beacoo Bad ५ 3 tayo {7४ {५530 tint THREE ti

G ०2००० ००१०७००० @००००० (ददिः ०० 4 chattdro chatuyod chatasso ०८८4४ 7008, chaty % ~ Op 9 panychs FIVE (1886) panycha ® ¢3009 ॐ GOOD 50. 6 so 0 chha SIX ores so or «chia 1 Dey _ 8B 7 satta SEVEN ox sattu

O ~ WS 8 athu EIGHT sah athu

@ ० । । ॐ० 9 nava NINE eae nara ¬ 5232 =

10 dusa TRN cae di 5 £

~

JO 21 J) 22

J? 25

Numerais from Eleven to Thirty Eight

23292 ehadasa COI96) 59 ehdrasa 81892 14/70/1111 Od न] 22 barasa

0026}39

{लवकः

१३

chuddasa

^) @ 322) Punychadasa ^° ~~ puunarasa 6291 300

solasa

9993199 |

+

ELEVEN | 24

J9 TWKive | 29 JC 26 JV THIRTEEN | 27 0

“FOURTEEN | 28

JE

FIFTEEN | 29

“a vO SIXTEEN | 30

| २2 .

satturasa SEVENTEEN | 31 9०5०० QJ Uthdrasa - EIGHTEEN | 32

polsay

navadusa NINETEEN |... ८०२१६०० ९२ ekunuviza 33 oe 27 risa TWEN TY 3, 62०48 २१ ८2502८८ ॐ - 2620 | २० ehavisa Ove [33 02800 22 ba visa. TWO 37 300899 | ९० teresa, THREE , 38

6०98० 7०८८ ` 007800 chaturisa Opg800 die a chhupbisa 2993809 satteéhisa %018.00 atuvisa 901809

UUAIT3A

८०२३००2 हि

ekunatinsa ८ 323 tinsa cords’ ao ekatinea 688ˆ23 04.111. 099390 battins: COD98"00 tettunsct ९-१८-०

chatutinsa

॥ ॥

punychatinsa ..,

००83

chhattinsa

॥ :

sittitensa 9०602" 0

८{ ५८८ 1४3८

THIRTY.

TWEXTY FOUR

FIVE SIX SEVEN EIGHT

NINE

ONE

TWO

THREE FOUR FIVE SIX SEVEN

BIGHT

९९ 89

panychuchuttdlisa ...

Numerals from Thirty ‘Nine to Siety Secon.

S003" 00 navatinsa THIRTY NINE ८०२१०२० ekunuchattald =... , ९325829

chuttilisa १89०. chuttalisa 0204833 tdlisa seh Garo gro0800 ekachattabisu 68०228०० divech ittalésa OIOQRIOO hachattdlisa ०0962483 {९.10 tttalisa ... THREE 00209300890 ९८2८00८4 ८7४ sa...

09303302805

FORTY OD

ONE

TWO

FOUR

FIVE 00००००83 pinychatdlisa 2009390800 chhuchattalisa 003R°0990.8.00 satta:hattdlist ... SEVEN s9g09Q008a0 athuchattdlisa ... BIGHT १००००००९ nuvachatalis t GOQPOPIIOO ekunapanyasa {~¬

८८८५८

SIX

NINE

FIFLY

9 51

15

73 ८0200299 ekapanydasa FIFTY ONE CG ROPOY ॐ dwepanydsa TWO GOIOPO9 ow) tcpanydsa . THREE OOQOP99 ॐ chatupunydsa =... FOUR O PROPL? ~¬) panychupanydsa ... FIVE JOO P9599 chhapanydsa SIX OORROPDI > sattupanydsa SEVEN Se S 233 athupanyd EIGHT ८१२ 2 90 nopanydsa NINE cog pong ९८१८८5५८ /४८ 00g sathe SIXTY ८०००4 ehasathi ONE gloo§ dwasathi TWO ०००००४६ {45८८1 ८ THREE €~ ¬> ध chatusathe FOUR opgo0g panychasathi ... FIVE 20008 chhasathi SIX saltusuthe SEVEN

OD

0)

Numerals from Sity Eight fo Ninety Nine.

sg709

athasotht SIXTY EIGHT | 538 ३०००६ 06 470 21050 { 0६ NINE | 84 ८०२२०८2० 2 ehunasattatu ... 85 2० ag sattuti SEVENTY 86 2०:0६ 04 50110202 87 (2 OO ehasattat ONF | 88 gloognd3 0९ dudsattati two | 89 ०0०2००2 (xe) tesattate THREE | 90 ००१००२० GO chatusattati FouUR | 91 ०0०8 @) panychasattatt ... FIvE | 92 23 ९२ chhasattuti six | 93 DOQRIO EG sattusattate SEVEN | 94 9०5०024 ९? athusattats EIGHT | 95 १० ०222 EG narvasattati । Nine | 96 6०२१००९५ ९4१ ९1010 5४४ = 97 3908 20 asttt EIGHTY 98 cack | Ge ekastts ONE | 99 glotd3 | ८1८45241 TWO ।...

८029०28

{९८८5241 KIGHTY THREE 00999083

chaturatti FOUR 02280

1101१८00 दर FIVE 20622६48

chhulastti SIX 226

1111110 SEVEN 996 9503

र it EIGHT

८०९१११०५ ९104, ,.. NINE $92

naruty NINETY &००‡०(५

९1:04721:24८ ONE 6330103

dwenavutr TWO

०००२०८५

tenavutr . THREE

00330|%3

cha tunarule FOUR

OpBPOLH ponychanavuts ... FIVE OHO Tes

chiuanavule SIX 226} ee

satllaunarvils SEVEN Se < Pol

athanarvute EIGHT

१1

navaunatutr NINE

COQ» ~¬¬

ehunusata

Numerals, One Hundred and Ujawards. 75

300 2000 | १०० ०2०65 100 satan § ONE HUNDRED 500 = panychasatan FIVE HUND. €> 2०03 Goo 9८20200

ध ९1050102} =... es 600 chhasatan =. SIX JOO GgZo000 1०० 90939005 200 dwesatan TWO... 700 suttasatan = SEYEN ... 900 G0D9000 (00 922०0 300 tesatan THREE ... 800 athasatan =‘ EIGHT ... GOO ©०१३००० GOO 300000 400 chatusatan FOUR ... 900 navasatun NINE 9000 - 3020009 - 9000008

10606 dusasatan sahassan A THOUSAND 2000090 22022009026 (० 100000 satasahassan ` lakkhan A LACK 90000000 0029 ०२०९ 10000000 kote kute TEN MILLIONS 000000000000000 ०0००००४ 100000000000000 | pakoti A HUNDRED BILLIONS 2000000000000000000000 GODD 8o 222 1000000000000000000000 = kotippakoti TEN TRILLIONS

0909 १ FROQOLD socagiooc ® 8319 sgI105 ० Sq918 @ 000900 >© ०० ॐ०€€&' ० 69020780 ०२ 2० 9g ०१५४ ॐ 0१८ ॐ पतृक 65 ०१९ 02409 ० @U00000008 ० 9०००० so The names given above designate numbers, that have multi- ples of seven ciphers after a unit, equal to the numbers set against

the several names. Thus: nahultan has aunit with 28, sokandhikan has a unit with 91.

ninnahutan ` as 85. wuppalan ध ` 98, akkhobhant ae 42. khumudan ७; 105. bindu whe 49. paduman see 112. anbiutan , as 56. pnatarikan ane 119. nirabpudan कितः 63° khathanan she 126, ahahan oa 70. mahdhkathdnan ... 1338. apapan कि 77. asangkhyeyyan =. . . 140,

atatan ak 84, 1. €. “an innumerable number.”

76 Ordinals.

There is much diversity in writing the numerals between twenty and ninety. All the forms given above with a final a are often written with a final », and always so in the nominative. Twenty is visa, visan, visatan, and visati. Thirty follows the same analogy, as, tisa, tinsa, tisan, tinsati, and tisati. Forty is written chattdlisa, chattalisan, chuttdlisa—san, chotiditsa—san, and tdlisa—tisun. And fourteen, besides the form given, is also written choddasa, and chatudasa. Sixty is sometimes written with chha, chhath, and the v in nava, nine, is occasionally changed to 0, as novt- sati, twenty nine, and nopanydsa, fifty nine.

There is also a want of uniformity in writing some of the large numerals, as: kofippakoti, and kofipakoti; and akkhubhant, and akhobhani—bhani; apapan, ababan, and apaban; nirappudan, and nirabpudan ; atatan, and atatan; sokandhakan, and sogandha- kan; uppalan, and upaian; kumiuddan, and xumadan; and asang kheyyan—yan-yani.

§ 161. The first five numerals are declined in § IJ3-117. Above ` five the numerals are of ail genders, whatever may be the gen- der of the form in which they are declined. From Five to EIGH- TEEN inclusive, they are declined like panycha Five, in the plural number, as given in § 115. All the numerals between eighteen and ninety nine are declined in the singular number only. Eka- navisati NINETEEN is an example, (§ 118.) | Kachchayano says from twenty to ninety inclusive they are of the feminine gender. One hundred and upwards are neuter, excepting those that have a final ४, which are feminine. They are usually declined in the singular, like ehunasata in § 116, but they take occasionally plu- ral terminations.

` Ordinal Numbers.

§ 162. Above four the Ordinals are formed from the Cardinals

by affixing the particle ma, corresponding to the Sanskrit मः

tate THIRD ~ chatut ल ono tative 00999 chatutta OURTH 90000 sattama = SEVENTH द Go athama EIGHTH > 0 navama NINTH 59 2502204 TENTH

(28 000 adasama ELEVENTH 13000 dwadasama TWELVTH

oe

CHAPTER VL.

‘ DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.

The Pali pronouns are nearly related to Sanskrit, and more

remotely to the pronouns of all the Indo-European languages. Personal Pronouns.

§ 163. The two first personal pronouns are treated together by Kachchayano, and he refers them to allied bases, to ahma I, and tukma tHov. So the Greek iyo and su, the Latin ego and tu, the English I and Thou, though apparently widely apart, are made from the same base. The declensions are given in § 120, 121, and show a striking resemblance to thc Greek, but they con- tain redundant forms in no ani vo, corresponding to the Litia nos and vos.

The Sanskrit has also nah and vah, but their usage d.ffees from Pali. In Sanskrit they are used in three cases only, but in Pa- li they are used in five, being foun] in the nominative and the in- strumentive in which they are never used in Sanskrit. It 18 note worthy too that Kachchayano gives examples to illustrate thzir usage in these two cases, while he gives none for the other cases ; as if he were pointing out a usage that might be questioned. Here the Pali, as in some other instances,is nearer the Latin than the Sanskrit is; but the ablative is wanting in Pali, though com- mon in Latin. If formed regularly, it would be १०0८ and voblu, very like nobis and vobis.

§ 164. The Third Personal Pronoun is referred to the base ta. It is often used as a demonstrative, and occasionally as a de- finite article, but more like the Greek than the English, and ths declension in § 122. exhibits a great resemblance, in form, to tha Greek Article. A redundant form, out of the nominative case, 13 found in nan, which dves not appear in Sanskrit; but the poetic nin, in Greek appears to be the same word.

§ 165. The word which Kachchayano refers to bhavanta, used in respectful addresses, like “Your Lordship”, may be regarded as an Houorific Second Personal Pronoun. It is deciined like bhu-

yard, § 102. but is irregular in son.e of its cascs as:

16

78 Fluonorific Pronoun,

MASCULINE, Singular. Plural.

230 ००0 त‰2 GOIIGS, DOCS Nom. bhavan bhonto bhonte bhavanto

000.3 Ace. = bhavantan

IIOOID Ins. bhavaté

COIIDSOD9 0. G_bhoto FEMININE—Singular

D063, 0900099 09063 Voce. bdbhante bhoto bhoti

It is most frequently met in the Pali books im the vocative,

bhante, which though given by Kachchayano in the singular only, is used in both the singular and plural. It occurs six times In the short Asoka inscription found at Byrath, but was misunder- stood by Prof. Wilson, who rendered it verbully.* It is used by A- soka in addressing the Buddhist assemhly precisely as it is used in tke examination for the Buddhist Priesthood, where Spiegel ren- ders it VENERABILES.

Possessive Pronouns. § 166. The Possessive Pronouns have no independant bases of their own, but are made from tho genitive cases of the personal pronouns, as:

COO0O%me vachanan “The word of me”; i, €. My word OPEC manan mama ‘The mind of me”; i. €. My mind. GOD owen) te nzati ‘The relatives of thee’’; 1. €. Thy relatives.

~ ०६०१००७5 fava pitunoddnan ‘The gift of the father of thee’’; 1. €. Thy father.

Og PROS dhammanychassa *‘And the law of him’; i. e. His law. BIQIQIAOO ahmakan mansan “The fiesh of us’; i. €. Our flesh म ~~ ¶ tuhmdkan dhanan “The property of you”; i. 6. Your property.

*Journal Royal Asiatic Society: Vol. XVI, page 361.

Reflexives and Demonstratives. “9

Reflexive Pronowns. § 167. The reflexive pronoun ह्र) 18 made from dttd 9०29

which is declined like puma § 101. Thus:

saQneso(Gugat3ocsc900008 attano brahmaniya nessdmi

“For myself [and] the Brahminee I will lead away.” Sometimes it is made by the indctlinable suyan 9903

e स्वय seayam in Sanskrit.

The reflexive posstssive pronoun own, 18 made by saka 300)

aH svaka in Sanskrit, as 2०209900 sakabhavena “By his Own existance.” It is often made also by atid as:

9०००१९०० 31022 029 attano puttake ddse katwd ‘‘Making the children of himself slaves”; i. e. His own children.

Demonstrative Pronouns. § 168. There are three demonstrative pronouns whese declen- 81018 are given in § 123-125,

Eta is formed from the third personal pronoun by prefixing e. Max Miiller says the correspending Sanskrit pronoun signifies ‘This (very near)”. In the books it is often used in a manner to justify such a definition in Pali, but again it is frequently used in precisely the same connection that the other demonstratives are, and in the Burmese translations it is constantly rendered by ०१

tho THAT.

Kachchayano gives ima as the base of another demonstrative, which in Sanskrit is referred to idam. It 18 in very general use for this.

The third demonstrative has amu for its base, but in Sanskrit it is referred to adas. Clough defines it this, and Max Miiller says of the Sanskrit word “That (mediate).” In the Burmese trans- lations it is uniformly rendered by eemee, ‘“‘Such a person as has been mentioned.”

The third personal pronoun is also in frequent use as a de- monstrative, thut or this; more often that.

The forms of efad and idam on the base ena in Sanskrit, are not found in Pali.

80 Relative, Interrogative, and Indefinite Pronouns

Relative Pronoun.

§ 109. The relative pronoun ya, wHo, or WHICH, is declined like the third personal pronoun, by rejecting ¢ and inserting y, (§126), much as the relative in Greek is made from the article by rejecting t

The relative is often repeated in the signification of WHOEVER WHATEVER, as:

COOIQCOODY | yesu yesu {141181८ “In what, what place,”; i. e. In whatever place. Interrogative Pronoun.

§ 170. The interrogative pronoun ‘in, WHO? WHICH? WHAT? is declined, excepting in the nominative singular neuter, like the rela- tive, substituting ¢ for y: (§127.)

The interrogative WHICH? or wHaT? is sometimes made by adding the comparative affix tara, or tama to the base ka, ass:

2 ~~न] ODO C096|CO090 katara katama katara katama WHICH? WHICH? WHICH?

In Sanskrit katara signifies “Which of two?” and Clough gives the same definition ; but this is not the exclusive usage in Pali, as:

© (<-> ० IQCRR kwa katarasmin sutts ‘Where? In

which, or what rule?’’? where the rules are numer ous. Indefinite Pronouns. § 171. By adding the particle ch: to the interrozative kin, the indefinite pronoun ANY ONE, Or SOME ONE is formed, as:

००००४६५८३११६००० kochthinaptriso ‘“Any, or some outcast.” - The relative ya is sometimes prefixed to the above in the same signification, as: COOPEOD $५००० 1. yena kena chi tena nahata ‘‘Have they been taken away by any one, or sume one?” Occasionally it signifies EVERY, as: 2o0dc3B a8 idha yun kinycha atthi ‘There is auy thing, i. 6. every thing, in this place.” ९६९०-०] po 8०2०-2 iturad EITHER, OTHER, anya ANOTHER, anyamanyan, EACH OTHER, are a few other indefinite pronouns.

CHAPTER VII.

VERBS.

The Pali verb is nearly a!lied io the Sanskrit, but has few- er forms, and is characterized by greater simplicity. Voice.

§ 172. The Pah has distinct forms for two voices, like the Greek, and like the Greek too, it expresses three voices by these two sets of forms.

The Pali names of the voices express distinctly the significa- tion of each. ‘The first is;

OG)90908 3 parassa padant Fiom parassa, the genitive or dative case of para ANOTHER; and padani, the plural of pada A worpD: i. e. “Words to, or for ano- ther.’’—Transitive Verbs, or the Active Voice. The other 18 ;

9०(2०१००७)४ attano ०८८५५८५४ Fiom attano the genitive, or dative cate of aifad sELr, and paddu, as before; i. €. ‘Words for srtr-Intransitives, aid the Middle, and Passive # 01८९8. - The Passive however is distinguished by tak- ing y .before the terminations in the conjugaticnal tenses.

This is the theory of the Voices, but in practice the Micdle form may often have a transitive signification, like deponents in ‘Latin; so that active verls may be considered as conjugated in both forms; the passive however in ihe Aftanopadani only, and then distinguished, in part, by the characteristic y.

Mood.

§ 173. Pali verbs have four moods, the indicative, the optative the conditional, the imperative, and the infinitive. The benedictive and subjunctive moods do not exist in Pali.

The conditional 18 used to exyress that section of the op- tative, in other languages, in which the act has not been perform- ed through some difficult y Leing in the way. It supplies the place of the subjunctive, in the cl.use with र) with which it is intro- duced, as:

° °

6999 GO COS 0003 5००००००० se0$a000

so che ^ ydnan alubhissa agachchhissd

“Tf he hal hal a प्रा3 प; of eonveyare>, he wou'd ‘iis goie.”’

17

82 Tense, Number, und Person,

Tense.

§ 174. There are five tenses in Pali, the present, the perfect, the imyeifect, the acrist, and the future. One Jess than tke Sen- skrit which hay two futures. The three preterites correspond to the perfect, imperfect, and aorist of Greek verbs. Like Greek, the perfect reduplicates the first syllable, and the imperfect and aorist take a augment. These three tenses Kachchayano calls:

ela plone 809998 ००&००९

11८17041 hiyyattant ajjatunt

Kachchayano says that Parokkha denotes rast time undistin- guished, indefinite, The same tense in Sanskrit with the corre- sponding name, paroksha, is denominated by Yates the perfect, and defines it ‘“‘What was done at a very remote period.” Ben- fey also calls it the perfect; Williams, the second preterite, and says it has reference to an event done and past at some definite period.” Max Miiller writes of it: “The reduplicated perfect de- notes something absolutely past.”

Hiyyattan¢d is the Pali name of the imperfect tense. It is de- fined as a definite past, and ‘‘denotes time past before any portion of the current day,” aceording to Clough and Yates; but “time recently past before yesterday,”’ according to Alwis.

The aorist, ajjatant, is defined by Kachchayano as time past which is “near.”’ Alwis says it is “the preterite of to—day,” and quotes native authority to show that it commences at from three to five o’clock in the morning. These nice distinctions of the Grammarians do not appear in practice. What Williams writes of the Sanskrit is equally true of the Pali; “The three preterites are used without mueh distiaction.”

Number.

§ 175. The Pah verbs have the same numbers as the nouns,

singular and plural, lacking the Sanskrit and Greek dual. - Person.

§ 176. There are three persons, first, second, and third; but Kachchayano enumerates them in reverse urder, and calls the third the first, the second person the middle, and the first person the prin- cipal, or highest.

In modern Greek grammars it 1s common to precede the pa- radigms with the terminations of the various mocds and tenses, but this is precisely the mode of teaching grammar which existed anterior to a] uropean grainmars.

Verbal Terminations. 83

Terminations of Verbs.

§ 177. Kachchayano gives the following terminations for the vcices, moods, tenses, numbers, and persons of all verbs.

Active Voice—Parassa padéni. INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person.

Sin. 2१४४ 52 te

© 0 9०. Plu. mar tha anti

PERFECT TENSE.

30 G ॐ Sin. a e @

9 88 ९ Plu. hma ttha [^

IMPERFECT TENSE.

99 (69 SD

Sin. a 0 a

9 8 8 Plu. hima ttha . ८

40 सि 87

4 (3 शी Sin. a 0 ४

go 88 el Plu. hina - ttha un

FUTURE TENSE.

90008 90008 90003 Sin. ssadmi ssast ssati

2200 20909 2003,

Plu. ssama ssattha ssantt

24 Verbal Terminations—Active Voice.

=

OPTATIVE MOOD.

First Person. Second Person, Third Person. cogns cogp 8 Cog Sin. eyyaimi eyyast eyyce ८०२०० ८०००० ९०य| Plu. eyyanue eyyatha ९} ९८1

CONDITIONAL MOOD.

°

OOO GOOO D099 Sin. ssan 856 ssa

200099 29900 00509 Plu. ssdhma ssutha 55८८९80८

IMPERATIVE MOOD. g ५ és

Sin. net hi

tu ८ CO 5011 Plu. 2५८८ tha antu

INFINITIVE MOOD. ०१. {0८78 REMARBS.

The principal letter in all the first persons plural is m, and so it is in Greek.

The principal letter in all the second persons plural is ft, or 9 pronounced th in Burmah, precisely as it is in Greek.

The future tense is made from the present by introducing ss before each termination, and this is the way it is formed in Greek, excepting that one s is inserted instead of two.

The optative, or potential, mood is characterized by taking e, or eyy before the terminations throughout, and the Greek optative is formed in a similar manner by taking the connecting vowel ५. And the terminations are all the same as the present tense of the indicative, excepting the third person plural, which has a final 1५, aud a like exception is found in Geok.

Verbal Terminations.

Middle and Passive Voice—Attanopadént. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person. G COO COD

Sin. ९ 8९ te Cg ae JIC

Plu. hme hve ante

PERFECT TENSE.

et $88? 88

Sin. a ttho ttha CQ ०49 Ge) Plu. hme hvo re

IMPERFECT TENSE.

भ भ्‌ GOO 88 Sin. 4 or 2 8e ttha

ge 9 8। Plu. hmase hvan tthun

AORIST.

be GOO OD) Sin. a se a

०५ 9 8 Plu. hme hvan rh

FUTURE TENSE.

908 2222699 22202 Sin. 58८८४ 55८5९ ssate

2222 CG 90929 009 33, Plu. ssahme ssuhve ssante

18

8&6 Verbal Terminutions-~Middle und Passive Vorce.

OPTATIVE MOOD.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person. ८० ` ॐ ` GOO Sin. eyyan etho etha €4ˆ9 (०२००५) Ce Plu. eyyahme eyyahvo eran CONDITIONAL MOOD. 005 GOO 50000 817. ssan ssase ssatha, 220०० 2००4 2०७ ० Plu. ssdhmase ssuhve ` ssinsu IMPERATIVE MOOD. Cc ००० 29 ee) Sin- e ssu OY su tan 9०022 ०42 822 Plu. 4027156 ` — heo antan REMARKS.

The first person singular of the imperfect tense is 7 in all the copies of of Kachchayano to which I can refer, but it is in in both Clough and Alwis. So the third person singular is ६2 in the books in Burmah, but द in Clough and Alwis. Since in both instances it is more probable that a letter has been dropped by careless tran- scribers, than that one has been added, the Singalese books are probably correct, but the books in Burmah agree with Sanskrit.

In the second person plural of the optative, the a is long, as: eyydhvo, but it is short in Clough and Alwis. The same person in the imy:erative varies between ss and s.

Many of these middle and passive terminations closely resem- ble those of Greek verbs in m:. Take for instance the present

tense:

Pa. Gr. Pa. Gr. Pa. Gr. Sin. e MAI se SAI te TAI Plu. hme METHA hve STHE ante ^ प्त

In genera], though there are many points of difference, alt the terminations are nearly allied to the Sanskrit, हण many are

identical.

Verb Conjugated. | 87 Paradigm.

§178. The following is an example of a Pali verb united to the preceding terminations. Pacha to cook; Germ. BACKEN, 10 BAKE. Active Voice.—Porassapadant. INDICATIVE MOOD, PRESENT TENSE. Second Person.

First. Person. Third Person.

oolS

00083

(6

Sia. pachami pachast pachate

o6le 0000 003, Plu. pachama ˆ दरक pachunti

PERFECT TFNSE,

O00 (€ OOO Sin, papacha papache papacha

008g (००९ O09 Plu. papachihma papachittha papachu

IMPERFECT TENSE.

BOO 92006 39000 Sin. apacha apacho apacha

BOOZ ZOOL OQ Plu. apachahma apachuttha apachu

AORIST.

०००४ 9०००0 ००८08 Sin apache apacho apachi

8०90०५2 9०0० 9०0९ Plu. apachahma apachatiha apachun

| FUT@RE TENSE.

०९०००98 ०९६०००० ०९०००८५ Sin. pachissami 00455062 puchissati

०९६००००५ ०६००००० ०६९०५०३, Plu. pachissama pachissatha pachissanuti

88

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Pla...

Verbal Terminations—Active Voice.

OPTATIVE MOOD.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person. ००९०य्‌& ०२९०प8 ०५० pacheyyamt pacheyyast pacheyya Ocouqle OGOuqloo ००९००य्‌| pacheyyama pacheyydtha pacheyyun

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 99०९८००8 9००६८००० 80080000 apachissam apachisse apachissad 9००६०००० «= 90800000 s00800809 apachissahmd apachissatha apachissansu IMPERATIVE MOOD,

0008 0003 ५००१ pacham pachaht pachatu

620 829 ९9||

pachdma pachatha pachantu

INFINITIVE MOOD. ०४०१ pachitun PARTICIPLES. PRESENT PARTICIPLE

Mas. Fem. Neut.

(6 O08 00%, pachan pachantt pouchantan

PAST PARTICIPLE. 0006) 0002003 00026 pachatawrd . pachatavati pachatavan

FUTURE PARTICIPLE.

o8oo8 08000 3. ०६०००

pachissan pachissant pachissantan

CONTINUATIVE PARTICIPLE.

08039 080909 08099

pachitwa, or pachitwdna, or pachituna

Verb Conjugated—Passive Voice. 89

Passive Voice. The passive voice is formed by adding the terminations of the Atitnopaddni to the root. In the present and imperfect tenses, and the optative, and imperative moods, y is prefixed to the ter- minations, but the y is often assimilated to the last consonant of the base ; as in this example, where it ts permuted to ch.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

Second Person.

First Person. Third Person.

O6Q ^ >~ OF >> Sin. pachche pachchase pachchte | 0829 CQ 29 OP 23, Pla. pachechah.ne pachchahve 2 2९/0८/८1८९ ~ PERFECT TENSE. ००५8 0083Q90 oc 8g Sin. papachi papachittho papaehatthe ००8०८ ०-६>५2 0०६5 Plu. piupuchihme papuchihvo pupiachire IMPERFECT TENSE. s908—8 BOQ 200 FCW Sin. apachchi—chchin apachchuse apachchauttha GOQ_SON = HCY” .¬ 9; ६3 Plu. apchchuhmase = apachehuhvan apachchatthun AORIST. SCO 9906 200 89063 Sin apuchit 02261 ise apacha 9०.8०८ 21 SCO) Plu. apuch: hie apachihvan ८०८८९१८ FUTURE TENSE. 68008 o8200309 == o8o20e00 Sin. prehissan prchissase parhissate 08000039 ०६०००54 oBa0023, Pla. 1071 "4 sedhine 00.८2.134. 1 ६५८३४५८८

19

90 Verb Conjugated—Passive Voice. OPTATIVE MOCD.

Firet Person. Second Person. Third Person. + © ध ९ ~ QO! (८ & <~ OGQOO Sin. pachcheyyan pachchetho pachchetha OC QOYISO ०८६०००५२ ०८१० Plu, pachcheyyahme pachcheyyadhvu pachcheran CONDITIONAL MOOD. 92008025 9४०००0०० 9००8०००9 Sin. upachissan apachissase apachissatha 8. ् ००९६०००० 900820979 ०००६०६०१ Plu. apachissdhmase apachissahve apachissinsu IMPERATIVE MOOD. OCQ ORY 08 OD Sin. pachche pachchasu pachchatan oglgeoo ०६००० 083, Plu. ८८१८ 4101456 pachchahvo pachchantun

INFINITIVE MOOD.

०९६०4

pachitun PARTICIPLES. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Mas. Fem. Neut. C@GIS99 06039 (०८ ५०§ pachamano pachamana pachamadnare PAST PARTICIPLE.

o8e000 ८०९६००० ०९८०३ pachito pachita pachitan

FUTURE PARTICIPLE. o8ooego (8८ &2 oto 0° pachitubbe pachitubba pachitabbun

Permutations of Y. 91

MUTATIONS OF Y. § 179. The following examples illustrate the permutations of y, when used to characterize the passive voice :

2 oe OO ९(&०८>

saka to BE ABLE sakhate 18 ABLE. vacha to SPEAK, vuchchate IS SPOKEN.

OS OA OQCOD

mada or maja 0 SQUEEZE IN THE HAND, majjate IS SQUEEZED.

५० QQ ८६५ QAcoo

budha or bujha to KNow, byuddhate bujjhate 18 KNOWN.

0 [९) ; ०० ^~ १ ^> ~~

vuda to INCREASE, vuddate IS INCREASED. hana to KILL, hanyate IS KILLED.

CODD COOCOD QO © QCOD

labha to OBTAIN, labbhate 18 OBTAINED. dhama to DISCIPLINE dhammate IS DISCIPLINED.

C6) <> ~> OC (७ ८५८ kara to DO, kayyate 18 DONE. phala to FINISH, phallate Is FINISHED. 89 8६५09 890 82009

diva to PLAY, dibpate 18 PLAYED. disa to SEE, dissate 18 SEEN. In Sanskrit the y is not changed to the preceeding consonant but, in instances like these, is united to it, as: divyate at व्यत

for dibpate above. Nor is usage uniform in Pali, dhamyate Og Cor

occurs as well as dhammate, and in many instances the y stands as an independant syllable, as:

2600009 ` 4०009 1012108 IS DONE. gachchhiyate 18 GONE.

§ 180. Thea or ¢ of certain roots is changed to ¢ before the y of the passive, as:

1 B03 3) 8५०८ da to GIVE, diyatt 18 GIveN. dhd to HOLD dhiyati 18 HOLDEN. 6) ००५ ७) 3५०८

thd to PLACE, thiyati 18 PLACED. md to LOVE, mtyati 18 LOVED.

92 Deponents.

(2) Boo ८) 6०0०-4 hd to ABANDON, hiyati 18 ABANDONED. pd to DRINK, piyati IS DRUNK

८.22 oR ८00 ०088

a ७ *

mutha to WORSHIP, mahtyati Is WORSHIPED. matha to NOURISH, mathi- १८८१५ IS NOURISHED.

$ 181. Yaja to worsuip, is changed in the passive to श , as:

COAD * eee

OOM oH COD yaja 0 WORSHIP, wjate IS WORSHIPED.

§ 182. Sometimes the passive voice has an active signification, like deponents in Latin, as:

| @ CS

~~~ = MIONCOD manyate KNOWS. jdyate PRODUCES.

§ 183. Occasionally the active terminations are attached to pussive bases in the signification of the passive, as: =

0[903 0096 vuchchati 18 870 एत्र, labbhati 18 OBTAINED. ००६००५९ 090 kariyati IS DONE, pachchate 18 COOKED.

~ २) 3 ripe DOD-py ५८६, Svod3 sajjanena buddho mtyati. ‘‘Buddha is beloved by good men.”’

Alwis renders mtyati by 18 MEASURED, as if from the root मा md, but it is constantly used in the Pali books, as above, like faz mid, defined in Wilson’s Sanskrit Dictionary, “To have affection cr regard for.” | ७.2} ClO 48०68 0

“Sin is abandoned by me.” Hiyate, is translated by Alwis, “Is reduced”, but the Pali u- sage is as if the word were identical with the Sansxrit root el § 184. On adlinz the characteristic y of the passive, ४ in 06 . O99 OOD vacha to SPEAK, vasa to DWELL, vahu to FLOW, to ARRIVE, is some- times changed to vu, as: ०(&० न wuchchate 78 SAID, eussati 13 DWELLING, Or RESIDING. § 183. The letter 2 when a final radical, is sometimes written after y in combination; and in vaha is changed tu J, as:

010903 ०९9५ ०५८५११६, or vulhulc, IS FLOWING, [> CONVEYED.

Regular Verbs. 93 Conjugation.

§186. In Greek there are several conjugations of verbs, owing to various additions being made to the root in some of its moods and tenses. Thus the root lab inserts n before the last consonant of the verb, and becomes lambano to TAKE; and zo adds nu, forming ०११९५१४४ to GIRD.

In a precisely similar manner, sometimes by the same in- crements, several conjugations are formed in Pali. These changes of conjugation are confined, with one exception, to the present and imperfect tenses, and the optative, and imperative moods, called conjugational tenses. Kachchayano enumerates eight conjugati- ons. In Sanskrit there are ten.

४ REGULAR VERBS.

§ 187. The first conjugation is characterized by the root tak- ing a final a. If the root ends in uw, the u is changed to v; if in 1, the 7 is changed to y, as:

० ०20८ & Goods bhu to BE, bhavati HE 18; 7 to CONQUER jiyati, HE CONQUERS.

Pacha conjugated above belongs to this conjugation, and all = the verbs of the first, second, third, and sixth conjugations in Sanskrit, appear to be embraced in this first one in Pali.

In the Sanskrit, ‘If a root be of the Ist conjugation, the rule for the formation of the the base in the conjugational tenses is, that the Guna be substituted for the vowel of the root throughout every person of every tense. Thus from budh ‘‘to know,” is formed the base bodh.’? No such rule is given by Kachchayano, but in [00:0४ of fact some verbs follow the rule, and some do not. The wu in the example above is not changed into 0, but remains unchanged jn Pali, See § 179, where this word occurs. Other examples are

^> "पाद COD OQ (०५ OD

yuja to JOIN, yujjate 18 JOINED. huja to BE ANGRY, kajhate

५8 qsc3 IS ANGRY. muda tq ENJOY, mudati HE ENJOYS. Following the rule are ० 0८). ` go 6०) 209 gupa to GUARD. (0४ HE GUARDS, rucha to SHINE, rochati IT SHINES 290 ©0090 209 Ba conads

sueha to REGRET, sochate HE REGRETS. ftija, to SHINE. tejate IT SHINES, 20

94 Kachchayano’s Conjugations.

This substitution of o for u, and e for 7 has its parallel in Greek, where “‘The present and imperfect exhibit the root in its most protracted form,” which is as true of Pali as of Greek.

This change of vowels is called in Pali vuddhi, but it is not necessary to use the term. It is the more inexpcdient because it is the same word as the Sanskrit vriddka, which designates a dif- ferent change of vowels, this being called in Sanskrit guna.

Its use therefore would lead to confusion.

§ 188. Kachchayano’s third conjugation, corresponding to the fourth in Sanskrit, ought to follow immediately on the first, for it is characterized by adding y to the root like the passive, so that the active is merely the passive base with the active terminations, while the [1881९ is subjected to no change. No new element 18 introduced, and it is merely a combination of the passive of the first conjugation, which with this may be regarded as the regular verb. |

These two cembined conjugations probable contain more than four fifths of all the Pali verbs, and the student who has mastered the casy paradigm given, can understand at sight four fifths of the ` verbal forms he will meet in his reading, and the remaining fifth, belonging to other conjugations, may be properly regarded as irre- gular verbs.

` Still it is useful to to retain the arrengement of Kachchayano especially for readers in Burmah, who may wish to refer to the o- riginal work, and because the classification resembles that of the Sanskrit native grammarians, which has been followed, with more or less modifications, by all writers on Sanskrit grammar.

Kachchayano names each conjugation after the example he uses to illustrates it. Thus:

2०6) ag qoo8 १? 1. एप्त ^+ from क to BE. 2. RupHApD1, from rudha to RESTRAIN.

8८}8 Bo p08 29

3. pivADI, .. diva to pLay. 4 swipl, ... € tO HEAR. 5 ~ * Roof =o 0058 002 5. एः ... कं ८0 Buy. 6. उवप, ... gaha to TAKE.

02228 02? Qqol8 ९०

7. TANADI ... ६८क EXTEND 8. cuvuRAVADI ... 00 to STEAL.

Insertion of n. 93

SECOND CONJUGATION.

§ 189. The second conjugation corresponds with the seventh m Sanskrit, and is characterized by the insertion of the anuswara, an, before the last consonant of the root, like math in Greek, that inserts n and becomes manthand ‘‘to learn.” The following is an example of this conjugation, in the active voice.

‘Chhida to CUT, SUNDER; Latin; sciD, ScINDO, to cUT. Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person. 38318 2888 28 $ Sin. chhindami chhindast chhindati Bglo a8 ¢ 00 B “os Plu. chhindama chhindatha chhindante

IMPERFECT TENSE.

9००९ 9००6० ङ्गी 99०6)

Sin. achhinda achhindo achhinda 9०95 “ 42 9998399 carver] Plu. achhindahma achhinduttha achhindu

OPTATIVE MOOD.

8०४< Begeyl8B 28०4

Sin. chhindeyydmi chhindeyydst chhindeyya Begogile 28 “०८० Begody Plu. = chhindeyydéma chhindeyyatha chhindeyyun

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

28 g13 28 $ 3B 307

Sin. chhindami chhindaha chiindatu By 28 % 0 28 ai Plu. chhindama chhindatha chhiulu

$ 190. The final radical may take either a, 7, 7, e, or 0, as: ९ > QQ ॐ %?& ५ gg’ goad qegod

rundhati, vundhiti, rundhiti, rundheti, or rundhoti, opsTructs.

96 Third Conjugation.

§ 191. The m before the last consonant is subjected to the re- gular permutations given in § 88. Thus:

De ॐ 22 239 2969903 bhaja to ENJOY, bhanyati ENJOYS. sabha to GORE, sumbhoti GORES.

§ 192. The passive is made by adding y to the root, and the terminations of the Attano padani, as:

१६०५०५८ rundhayate, HE OBSTRUCTS, Or RESTRAINS. THIRD CONJUGATION.

§ 193. As has been noted jn § 188. the third conjugation is characterized by inserting y between the root and the terminati- ons, as:

Diva to sport, to Go; Greek THE) to RUN. Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. First Person. Second Person. Third Person.

8013 3०8 8 od

Sin. dippamt 07110052 dippati 8८) 8८० So Plu. dippadma dippatha dippante | IMPERFECT TENSE. : 22 5) <> 5०8६ 9०८ 9 Sin. (कुव adippo adippa ir 9] ~ be | 309 ०००९683 9 Plu. adippahmé adippattha adippu

OPTATIVE MOOD.

Sogn) 8

Sequgy

Sin. dippeyyaémi dippeyydst dippeyya

9०६२) ५ 9०८०० ७०६२ Plu. dippeyyama dippeyyatha dippeyyun

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

8513 S008 8०१

Sin. dippami dippahr dippatu १

dle 320 89 SI

plu. dippadma dippatha dippante

Fifth Conjugation. 97 FOURTH CONJUGATION.

§ 194. The fourth conjugation is characterized by adding zu, una, or na to the root; like ag, in Greek, which adds nu, and be- comes agnwmi to BREAK. `

In the singular of the present and imperfect tenses active, and in the imperative mood the first person of both numbers, and both voices, and the third person singular active, the conjugational u 18 changed to o.

The following 18 an example of this conjugation:

Papuli. ९, pa—dpw] to optain; Latin, apo to OBTAIN. Active Voice. INDiCATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person. ५) ५०८०० = लात०८०००8 Sq: ०००५ Sin. = papunomi papunost papunoti ८) 007० ५५५०9 ola ३ शिप. pdpunuina papunutha - papuirw.rite Ur, , 6426 6५००8 ७५००००८ Sin, pdpundmi papundst papunati a > ® <) ; ५।५८४५०० 0102229 «= SI Qam0 8. Plu. pdpundma papunatha 14. 4.10

FIFTH CONJUGATION. §195. The fifth conjugation, corresponding to the Sanskrit ninth, adds nd to the root, like the Greek dam, which adds ११८८ in the middle voice, and becomes damnamai {0 SUBDUE. The limits of the preceding conjugation might have been easi- ly extended to include this one. The following is one of Kachchayan)’s examples:

21

98 Sixth Conjugution.

In to cur; Greek LUO to ९0087.

Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person. ०० ०९१०8 = ०26 Sin. (1८114097 lundst lanate ०९१०० ०५१९२०० 02998, Plu. lunama lundtha lundnti

SIXTH CONJUGATION.

§ 196. The sixth conjugation is confined, so far as known, toa single verb, and is in nowise entitled to the distinction of a conju- gation. This verb is referred in Sanskrit to the ninth conjugation corresponding to the fifth in Pali, to which it might be appropri- ately referred.

Kachchayano says the conjugation is characterized by adding ppa, or haa to the root, as:

Gaha, Sans. Graha, to TAKE, Germ. GREIFEN, to GRIPE, GRASP.

Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person,

canis ८२०८६०8 ०९०५ Sin. gheppdmi gheppast gheppati

caodle ००००० ०००८५. एप, 014010४ gheppatha gheppanti

Or,

00926 0त>228 oagod3 Sin. = gahnami gahnasi gahnati

0त>2० 00>2.0 00308,

Plu. = gahnama gahnathu gahnanti

Kara Conjugated, 99

SEVENTH CONJUGATION. § 197. The seventh conjugation is the eighth in Sanskrit, and is characterized by taking 0, or yira after the root.

The principal verb in this conjugation is kara to po, and it occurs in books more often perhaps than any other verb, except the verb to BE. It is conjugated with various irregularities. All the forms found in Kachchayano are given below:

Kara, Sans. Kri, to po, Make. Latin; cREO to CREATE, MAKE. Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD, PRESENT TENSE. Second Person.

First Person. Third Person.

Sin. karome karost karoti 020०2 (269209 ००0०2 Plu. karoma karotha karonti Or, 02५९8०26 ००५८६००8 ०2५89५8 Sin. 04/70 kaytrast kaytrati ००५६००७ 0०2५899 mBq, > Plu. kayurdma kaytratha kaytrante Or, ०२८५ ०२६ॐ ०२६० = Sin. kuppame kuppast kuppati ०२९० ०२० ROG, Plu. kuppama kuppatha kuppante AORIST. 90048 2972202 90308 Sin. ahdst akaso akast 9०० 9०022००0 5०59 29” Plu. akdsahma al-asnttha ahusun

0 2998

on) ००28

0०००2५8

100

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu,

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu.

` First: Person.

9०००६ akartv ROD 299

akarahmna

02246

10121212 200

kahima

02.026 kahdmi OD 2232

kahadma

0००2०26

karissadmi

026 22930

karissdinee

०००००26

kareyyaint

2 200यै2©

1:८*९॥/ ydind

(2 ००24 karome (>) 26)0C

karvma

Kara Conjugated.

AORIST.

Second person.

4ॐ (>> >न]2

akarv

9००

akarattha

FUTURE TENSE.

0220858 kahist 02230 kahitha Or, 07100998 kahasi MD002D00

kahathau Or,

m§o0008 karissast 0/6}

kartssatha

OPTATIVE MOOD. ~ ००५०१28

kareyydsi

(2८ ०22

kareyyatha

(2204124 ८८१६४ on) ><} 900

harotha

Third Person.

9०28 akart ०02१}

akarun

0246 kahite 2०08

kahinti

0200

kahdti 03.232 3, kahinti

omGo0003

karissate

ar§o003.

karissante

OC नप्‌

kareyyo

००००)५य्‌/

kareyyun

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

<) 26309

karotu

02 >025.\

karoute

>

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu.

CONTINUATIVE PARTICIPLE.

(> ~

katwa

Kara Conjugated.

Passive and Middle Voice:...: , : :‡ - ; 2: INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Second Person.

First Person. CSO kayye

०५०५८

kayyahme

(> 6००५० kariye (2 5० cg

kariyahme

Cy 26) kare

००६०८

karihme

०२०५

kure

(९ CG

kuruhme

INFINITIVE MOOD.

४.31

kattun

PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

O00

Lathan

(02

kutuna

(24/23 kayyase ONO 29 kayyahve Or,

०26५०५०० kariyase ००६५००५

kareyahve

Or, 026० harise

००६०५ karthve

Or, O? q COO kuruse

१२? 29

huruhve

०००

kdttun

PARTICIPLES.

1 ~

~~

Third Person.

००५२००2

kayyate

MO{C3,

kayyante

02600009 kariyate

०6०००

kariyante

02620 karite

on 23,

20५1८

7 SOD kurute

NAS |

hurunte

012909

katun

PASSIVE PAST PARTICIPLE.

katabpan

hatabpan

(>> ०23

kato FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLE.

0 >] © “\ © mong’ carlos” ००६ kattabpun

22

a

1

` 101. -

~

-.-104 . “~ De | Eighth Conjugation.

- "2 7. ths psec - ` BIGHTH CONJUGATION. § 198. The eight conjugation, like the tenth in Sanskrit, ought to have been treated as the conjugation of causative verbs; but the form though causative has not always a causative signification. The characteristic letters are e, ne, aya, and naya. If the first vowel of the root be a, it is lengthened into 4d, if a, or 7, itis changed to 0, or €. asin § J87. anda final u, or e 1s changed to v, or y. The following are examples of this

conjugation: Chura to STEAL; Latin FUROR to STEAL. Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person.

०९००6 ५€6)5न्‌ॐ3 ०6००0 Sin. = ०07९४ choresi choreti

66669 66)66}9 ०61०0 ड Plu. = churema choretha chorenti

Or,

८6०09 0८०10०8 ०6) Sin. chorayami chorayasi chorayati

06) 661०0०00 >. काप. chorayama chorayatha chorayant

Mata, Sans. Mana, to DELIBERATE; Latin MEN—MEMINI.

०25. 0308 “<

Sin. mantemi mantest mantett O23,0 O3,00 oe ङ, Plu. § mantema mantetha mantente Or, 03003 “22 5०4 8170. = muntayame mantayast mantayati

“5.०0 93200 ^$.

Plu. = mantayana muntiyatha manta yantr

Roots differently conjugated. 103

Verbs of several Conjugations. $ 199. The same root is often conjugated in two or more con- jugations, sometimes with a different signification; as:

2:8५ Bads

Hence arises this fourfold division of the roots:

bhindati Second conjugation, from root bhida. BREAKS

bhijjatt THIRD fee ... DISTRIBUTES.

I. Roots conjugated in one conjugation. II. a ae two

It. ae aa three

IV. ee oe four

These divisions are subdivided, and each subdivision is nam- ed by compounding the names of the several conjugations accord- ing to which the roots it includes are conjugated, as:

230) 3q008 bivddi rudhddi FIRST and SECOND conjugation, as:

SoB © 8५8

226188618 }/ 0; प

lipati limpati ANOINTS, SMEARS.

FIRST and THIRD coniugation, as: 52 520०6 {04८ thdyati STANDS, 18 ESTABLISHED, 030180308 buvddi swddi FIRST and FOURTH conjugation, as: ClooB 8०268 gdyati gindti sINGs.

2 ©) 80236228 buvadi kiyddi First and FIFTH conjugation, as: Gavod3 3003 ae ginatt CONQUORS.

2301 Sooso8 —- bavddi tanddi First and SEVENTH conjugation, as @00¢ 03 ०00००68 jagarati jdgarote AWAKENS.

2301 Sqep8 bivddi churadi FIRST and EIGHTH conjugation, as: Odo 205५ manati mdneti INVESTIGATES. qoo88ol8 rudhadi divddi SECOND and THIRD conjugation, ag

8० ५8५ munychatt muchchti 18 FREE.

104 Verbs of Four Conjugations.

80) 30००8 divadi churddi TAIRD and EIGHTH conjugation, as, ?८० १००५ १५०००५० ruppati rupeti rupayati. CONFUSES. O99 8023098 swadi kiyadi FOURTH and FIFTH conjugation, as: ६०८४००५० 33003 chinott chindtt ASSEMBLES.

2०8००१०४ swadi tanddi FOURTH and SEVENTH conjugation, as:

(५400203 ००८4 pdpunati pappott OBTAINS.

0301 qo 80०28 एष्व rudhddi churddi FIRST, SECOND, and EIGHTH conjugation, as:

08०8 ५5००८ 0५2०००८

111015४ 1८715८21 hinsete INJURES, KILLS.

0301830) 2030518 bivddi divddi kiyadi FIRST, THIRD, and FIFTH conjugation, as:

05०8००68 08०8००68 38209003

kilisati kilissati kilisanate IS vIC{OU3, 0308860) Saep8 | biivddi divddi chitrddi FIRST, THIRD, and EIGHTH conjugation, as: | ००2०8 ‰&ॐ cepcod3 ०५२०९००८

rochate vuchchate rochete rocheyatt SHINES,

2301 ७९6) 380) ५९ Cp छ hirddi rudhddi divads churdds FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, and EIGHTH conjugation, as:

89५8 833 86 cocsdd 60080०42 (11/11 vindatt 111. ८९९४५ ४९१५५८८४ KNOWS. 9301 39०) 8090 80202090 धवा dinddi swidi hinddi FIRST, THIRD, FOURTH, and एप्त Conjugation, as:

8०५8 ०० १८५००८३ gg003

davate duyuati dunoti dundti QOES, IS IN PAIN.

Gama cuusatyee Conjugated. 105

| Causal Verbs. | § 200. Any verb may be changed to a causal verb by adding tu the base e, aya, ape, or dpaya.

In Sanskrit p to denote the causative is introduced as an ex- ception, but it is regular in Pali, and is found frequently in the Asoka Inscriptions. Pe however is shortened to pi, as:

© ~ ~ ~ ~ od- 4 4. . = ~ J ~

-4 0४५७ ?2८ 10५ | bbadllh ५11,

Tyan dhuma lipi devanan piyenn Piyudusind rdnya (९0

“This law—writing 1s caused to be written by King Piyadasi ` beloved of the Devas.”

In bock Pati this same root, (व to WRITE, appears with the double consonant likkha, and pe for the causative instead of pi, as:

9993993 ०8202 29००6 = Bagocvago

akkharadni = Ukkhitwa savanntputte lilckhapetwad

bd

“Having written letters.” = न्फ डु caused to write on a gold plate.” The rules for the change of vowels are the same as given in

the eighth conjugation § 198. but usage varies in the lengtheniug of the first vowel of the root, and it is never lengthened before a double consonant. The following are examples: gamaya and gumaya CAUSE TO GO, chinfaya CAUSE TO THINK, and (4/८, hdrayc, kdrdpe, hardpaya CAUSE TO DO.

Active Voice.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

Third Person,

First Person. Second Person. q

(०0:26 (10.28 (९) ५०५3 Sin. gainayainrd gan yvase gamayati.

(1120 0 ` 0.0 Sleood, Pla genet yan gainrjaths 04111011/1( 017८

Or,

00034 0८00-0 00043 11. (५121 4/ 11४ (11:10 /118६ 01770 1#:1८/

(29092 (20.02.0 ०००5, Va. getinter yelsidet 7.11 gu 777 te

23

106

=. e ° Kara causative Conjugated.

Active Voice.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE. Second Person.

९5.28

First Person.

85,0008

Third Person.

830003

Sin. chintayamt chinatayast chintayati

83,0000 83.0000 Bsoc8 Plu. — chintaydma chintayatha chintayante

05) 2०9 05५28 ०5५4 Sin. = kavremi karest kareti

०1. mleqoco ०5० Plu, = karema kdretha karenti -

Or, |

220९968 = 0226008 = ०29०0०५8 Sin. = hdraydma karayast karayati

022०]००० = 029न००० ००09००० &, Plu, = kavayami harayasi karayanti

. Or,

0220}200& == 029620028 02262०0८ Sin. kdrapemi hardpest kdvdpeti

०००2००० = ०००००००० MogocoZ, Plu. = karapema kardpetha kardpenti

Or,

29०५५००७ ar0q000008 ar0q900083 Sin. kadradpayame karapayasi kardpayati

0906}200000 ONDE 9LUCGD 022990008, Plu. kdrdpaydma hardpayatha kardpayanti

Kachchayano says that ¢ is oceasionally used for a causa~ tive affix, from the root

goo eclonecd3 juta jotalati, CAUSES TO SHINE.

But the commentators say this is an interpolation, and is not found in the old copies of his Grammar.

Pivdsa Conjugated. 107

Desiderative Verbs.

§ 201. In Pali, as in Sanskrit, to avoid the circumlocution of us- ing the verb wisH, and the infinitive mood of another verb, cer- tain changes are made in the verb to express the idea by one word. The first syllable of the verb is reduplicated according to rules to be noted hereafter, and kha, or chha, or sa is added to the root. Thus, for

००००० 2.009 909038 22० 9 bhatun ichchhatt, is written bubhukkhuti, from bhuja toEAaT, and kh ‘‘He wishes to eat.”

०००२०५१ 9.23 @२&< ००० 20

ghasitun ichchhati, is written jighajjati, from ghasa to EAT, and chh ‘‘He wishes to eat.” |

५०१ PO Sdloocd3s ¢) 29

patun ichchhati, is written [ददद , from pa to DRINK, and 5८ “Fle wishes to drink.”

००००० 223 ०१०००००८ प 33 sotun ichchhati, is written sussusati, from sw to HEAR, and sa ‘He wishes to hear.”

9 | ००६०१६६ € 8०4५8 ५०५ 90 haritun ichchhati, is written jiginsati, from hara, to carry, and su “€ wishes to carry.”

Alwis says: “This word is written in all the Pali wcrks Jiy’.:- sati-should it not be Jihinsati?”’ The reply is in the negative, 1८ - cause one of Kachchhayano’s aphorisms says: “When the rect hara takes the affix sa, the whole root is changed to gin.”

The following example of Pivdsu, wWIsH TO DRINK, may serve to illustrate the conjugation of these verbs:

INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person.

661००28 661००58 661०4 Sin. pivdsdme pivdsast pivasatt

९6} &6)००00 Solon,

@ Plu. = pivdsdma pivasatha pivasante

108 A Hebrew 1110101.

Intensive, or Frequentive Verbs.

§ 202. To express emphasis, intensity, or frequent action, the buses of verbal roots are redunlicated. It is something parrallel to the Hebrew infinitive in such expressions as, noth yaumuth LYING THOU SHALT DIE.

Tt is remarkable that Kachchayano says nothing on this form of the verb. Alwis however refers to two of his examples as u- lastrations of it; cut they do not appear to be cases in point. Taney lack both the peculiar form and the peculiar signification.

599 SB — duddaluti, from the root duia which ‘Alwis de- fines: ‘“‘Ilumines intensely.”. But it is defined by commentators me:ely {9 “shine, or illuminate,”

oto OO changkamuti, from the root gana, Alwis de- fines: “‘Walks reveatedly.” But this is not the definition of the Scoliasts. They say it means to ‘Walk with the feet.” i.e. go 0.1 foot Moreover the Sanskrit uses the intensive form of this root, but both the redunlication, and the definition differ, as

गम जंगम्यते जंगमोति

gum, to GO, jangamyute ; jungaintti to WALK CROOKEDLY.*

The word however has passed into‘ Burmese with something of the frequentive signification. Thus in Judson’s Dictionary of}

2९१८१८२४ is defined: “A watk, a pace for walking to and 70

The Pali books furnish a form with the signification of the fre- quentive verb, in wh-ch the reduplicition consists of the whole base of the verb, and is interchanged with the participle, as:

००००० = 0} BAE{DODQGAJ9000 ००

chure chareyys from chara. uddhurissu uldharissain’, from dhara “Ifo mizht practice ‘Bringing out I will bring out, or

४ 7 t a 39

earnestly, or frequently.” I will bring out repeatedly.

Sometimes the reduplication is made w:th the 100; repeated and € The religious books contain such expressions as these:

२००१००९ १० 30308 09 ' 20§4

= fa he: A °

१८८८११५५ १५८८११८६१,८.१ 702 nile. vende candi’, ८८१५१ 1/८. vanddire | Fatoutly.’?

“Bowing I bow repeatedly.” Worshipping I worship tatently.

2). -11* 3 eee Oo. #Max Miller page 22¢. Williams page (32.

Frequentive Verbs. 109

In the last example the continuative participle and verb are ‘used in prec:sely the same signification as the reduplicated verb, which might be regarded as an abbreviated -form of the participle rather than as an intensive verb, but it lacks the 7 of the partici- ple.

If the insertion of a nasal be the characteristic of intensive or frequentive verbs, then Kachchayano gives several examples. But none of them are recogaized by his commentators as posses- sing the signification of the frequentive verb, and there is noth- ing in the text to indicate any change in the meaning of the verb; yet it seems certain that had Kachchayano intended to convey a special signification, he would have indicated it, as he does the de- siderative verbs. Kachchayano’s text in which the examples oc-

cur is the following:

995 ^ ~ >] ध dD 905 ^) 20 ०००) 8901609 OQR20% (20209

havaggassa = 4८, /0 = abhlutgse vuttamanassa havaggassa 0006] ०५०2०48 ९5 62 6००० chavaggo hati chikichehhati jiynjachchhati jighajachchhati 88०68 adoB = ००९०८ jigisate jangyamutt changhamati

त क <~ 0 €> ध 9) क Cc 3

Su08oopg 92452 9, SQL 20006

niggahitanycha abbhdsassa ante niggahitagamo 00०2436) oe egeds odedd hotiva changkamatt chanychalatt changgamate ,

“For ak classified letter, a ch classified letter.”

‘In the reduplication of the present tense, for a & classified

letter is a ch classified letter—jungygamati, chankamato”’ “And anuswara,”’

“At the end of the reduplication anuswara comes sometimes, changkamati, chanychalati, changgamati.”

Chanychalati 18 rendered sHakeEs; and changhkamati, changgamati, and, janggamati are all transluted HE GOES, chankamate once NE WALKS WITH HISFEET, All are probably from the same root gama, but they are sometimes referred to gumu and kamu. Possibly aq kram to इव ह्म may be the root of chanykamat.

५

24

110 Nominal Verbs.

Denominative Verbs. § 203. To express a sentence in a single word, several pa r- ticles are affixed to nouns which change them to verbs in the sig- nification of acting, or becoming like them, or treating another like them, or desiring them for one’s self, or using them as instru- ments.

(.) The affix dya is used to signify one makin g himself like the ncun. Thus, for ०६००&० 9००$ 9००2००2 (०2००० pappatamiva कद वटक, is writien pappatdyati.

“He-makes himself like a mountain.” ०25०४०० 2०न&&० s0QN03 9०००० ooaglucd3 sangho samuddhamiva attdnan dcharati, is written samuddhayati. “The church-assembly makes itself like the ocean.”

This form of the verb may be compared with such English words, as romanize, TO MAKE LIKE ROMAN; and latimwze, TO MAKE LIKE LATIN.

(b.) The affix tya is used to denote that a person, or thing, is treated as the person, or thing, expressed by the noun, as: 9००0060" ००6० = sx00qd3 ००६००५8 achhattan chhattamiva dcharati, is expressed by chhattyati

“That which is not an umbrella he treats as an umbrella.” magy 5० ००२५३ १६६०-० aputtan puttamiva dcharati, 18 expressed by puttiyate “Ee who is not a son, he treats as a son.”

(c.) This last affix, zya, is used also in the signification of desiring for one’s self, that which is denoted by the noun, as: ^ © es are) co Pp ०8 gee ogfood attuiu puttin ichchhahi, is written patttyati “7९ desires a vessel for himself.” BNI) woo Pods wo8cod3 OH ५ RY (11101 ghatae ichchhati, is written = ghattyati “IIe desires a water jar for himself.”

Ceylonese and Burmese renderings. 1j1

9093780 099 Od ogBood3 atttano vatthan ichchhati, is written vatthiyati, ‘He desires clothes for himself.” ०900०‰2 of भ्यू ०९००८ attuno dhanan ichchhati, is written dhanityati. “He desires property for himself.” (d.) To express the instrument by which an act is perform- ed, the noun is converted into a verb by affixing ya, as:

805. Ban000 2060068 s08enved3 - gitan vindya upagayati, is written wpavinayati.

‘“‘He 18 eminently skilled in singing by means of the lute.”

न 2 OD of ०9६ ००८०0०2 9०8००48 maggan hattind atikkamati, is written atihattiyate

“He goes over the road by means of an elephant.”’ Analogous with this is the English colloquial verb to 7007 Ir. Occasionally the verb is formed on the basis of an adjective,

as:

०8 809g) ०५००० 8०१६५०५५ ratti visuddha hotti, is written, visuddhdyatt. “The eveniug is pleasant.” Or, ‘*‘It is pleasant [by means of the evening. ]’’ (e.) Sometimes dra, and dla are affixed in the signification of MAKING, like ify in English, as: 00,4 cocepc3 203.603 santan xaroti, is expressed by santarati. । “He makes peace, or pacifies.”’ 2०82 ०2904 9093@00003 upukkaman karoti, is expressed by upakkamalat ‘He makes strenuous effort.” Alwis renders this phrase: ‘‘He devises a plan’, उपक्रम

upakrama, ‘A stratagem’’, might sustain this definition. 20990 upukkama however, is defined by the Pali lexicographers, ‘‘dili-

gence, industry.”’ This is another of not a few examples, in which the Pali of Ceylon seems to differ from the Pali of Burmah.

112 Changes in Reduplication.

Reduplicated Verbs.

§ 204. There are a few verbs which reduplicate their first syl- lable in some of their forms, like Greek verbs in m?, In Sans. krit they are raised to the dignity of a conjugation, the third, but Kachchayanu includes them in his first conjugation. The follow- ing is an example:

Dd to GivE; Greek 70 to GIVE. Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD.

= PRESENT TENSE. First Person. Second Person. Third Person. 886 836) 28 385) Sin. dadami daddst dadati sslo $3100 3, Plu. dadama dadatha dadénti

This reduplication is not confined to these verbs. The per- fect tense of all verbs is reduplicated, and desiderative and frequen- tive verbs are reduplicated, and since Kachchayano treats the re- duplication of all under one head, the laws that govern the redu- plication have been reserved for this place.

(a.) Ifa root begin with a second or fourth classified letter, it 38 changed to the corresponding first or third ; that is an aspirate is reduplicated by an unaspirate, as:

६ chichchheda, the कता tense of chhida—HE 001, ORO babhivee, er bhié—HE ‘BECAME. 80003 dadhati, the present tense of dhd—HE CARRIES.

| 4090303 bubhukichalt, se bhuja—wIsuES TO EAT.

(b.) A letter of the & class is changed in reduplication to a letter of the ch class; that is is a gutteral is changed to a palatal,

a

as: S293 chikachchhati, present tense of /itu-—HE PRACTISES MEDICINE.

Reduplicated Verbs, - {13 ६५९ ९1१11८00, present tense of kifa—HE PRACTISES MEDICINE,

(c.) Occasionally the reduplication is made by ¢ instead of k, as:

BRO takichchhati, as above—HE PRACTISES MEDICINE. 2: ` १0९1८041, present tense of gupa—HE GUARDS. -

| (d.) The aspirate h is changed in reduplication to Jj, as: ०0००८ 1474402, present tense of hd—HE ABANDONS.

१०६० ९०.०५ juhwati, or juhoti, present tense of hu,

. hu, 10 Sanskrit—HE OFFERS, or SACRIFICES. wD

OIE] jahéra, perfect tense, third person singular of hava, |= hri, in Sanskrit—He CARRIED, or TOOK. Alwis says “Abandoned.

(e.) The radical vowel if long is shortened in reduplication,

3843 | dadati, present tense of da—HE GIVES. 80003 dadhati, an dha—HE CARRIES.

(f.) Sometimes the reduplication takes 7, as: € २२९ jtghachchhuti, from ghasa—HE WISHES 10 EAT. 6०००५ pivasati from pd—HE WISHES TO DRINK. |

(4.) Sometimes a vowel is dropped in reduplication, as: ००३० babhiva, from bhi—HE BECAME.

Sometimes the vowel is retained, as: 09028 bubhukkhati, from bhuja—HE WISHES TO EAT.

(h.) The root thé sometimes becomes tita in reduplication. as,

५९5५8 titati—HE सा 06 ५०७०१ titatt—LET HIM STAND. ५००5० titeyya—HE MAY STAND ५०६०२] titayyun—THEY

MAY STAND. 29

114 Difference of Sanskrit and Palt.

2.) Sometimes the reduplication takes anuswara, as:

OVE changkamati, from kamu—HE GOES,

ogcod3 chanychulati, from chala—HE SHAKEs.

a

(k.) Sometimes for the root pd, piva is substituted in re- duplication, as:

80 pivati, HE DRINKS. ६००१ pivatu, LET HIM DRINK.

Sco piveyya, HE MAY DRINK. 8.2009] piveyyun. THEY MAY DRINK. . | Sometimes the bare root is used in the same signification,

as: NB pdte, HE DRINKS.

१.) When the roots pd and md take the affix sa, they some. times become vd, and man, after the reduplication, as: Scloo3 pivdsati, from pd—HE WISHES TO DRINK.

© 8९००५ vimansati, from md—HE INVESTIGATES, OF REASONS.

(m.) The final radical becomes ‰ when kh is added to a reduplicated root, as:

BBog ५ व्व) from tija—H® FORBEARS, HAS PATIENCE.

(n.) The final consonant is changed to ch, when chh is ad- ded to the final radical, as:

Kod tikichchhati, from kita—HE PRACTISES MEDICINE. Baad jighachehhati, from yhasa——-HE WISHES TO EAT.

€ 1९ jiguchchhatt, from gupa—HE GUARD3, PROTECTS. Alwis renders ‘He reproaches,” which accords with the San-

skrit. And the definition given above is identical with the San-

skrit when the root is conjugated without reduplication—gopayatt

ग्‌ पयति This proves that the signification of Pali forms can- not be safely inferred from the Sanskrit.

The Verb to Be. 113

Anomalous Verbs. |

First among anomalous verbs in all the Indu-European lan- guages, is the verb to BE. In Greek and Latin its base appears to be es, and in Pali many forms are made from asa. The An- glo Saxon, and allied tongues, made their verb to BE from the yoot be, and in Pali a complete verb from bz, in the signification of to BE, Or BECOME, is found in both the active and middle voices.

Webster says of the verb to BE: “‘It is defective, and its de- fects are supplied by verbs from other roots, am, is, was, were.” The defects are in the usage, not in the verb. _ It 1s complete in Pali, and in ‘some of the rural districts of England, the Pa- li forms of this verb are still spoken, which m books have been supplanted by ‘“‘am, is, was, were.” The roots asa, and bhi exist in Sanskrit, but the Pali has a third root hu for the verb to BE, with copious forms, that has no plage in Sanskrit, but which has been suggested, with great probabilty, to be of common origin with the Hebrew verb to BE, huh.

§ 205 All the forms of the verb to BE. are not found in Kach- chayano, but in order to furnish a complete paradigm, his defi- ciences have been supplied from other books in Burmah, and from the researches of Alwis in Ceylon.

Asa to BES Latin, ESsE, to BE. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person.

०० of 5B mB 9० 2०08 Sin. asmt or ahmt ast attht or atthi or sati

922 mo ॐअ 2० ००, Plu. asma or ahma attha santi or sante

Kachchayano gives atthi only for the third person, but the books supply in addition, afthi, and sat. The last is near the }] ^ asti of the Girnar inscriptions, and the two are brought the near- er by a rule of Kachchayano’s which says:

००&०००००००००6) 00) sabpdssasddi lopo cha “And a at the beginning of asa is erased in all.” Originally there would seem to have been tenses conjugated

in the middle voice, but the only trace remaining in use is the third person plural, sante.

116 Asa Conjugated.

AORIST. First Person. Seeond Person. Third Person. 9928. no 8 98 Sin. asin ast ast 9००8५) 9००88 9००8 > ७००१ Plu. = asthma asittha asinsu, Or asun ' REMARKS.

Alwis conjugates this tense with the initial 4 long throughout, like the Sanskrit, but the books in Burmah, so far as noted, make it short.

OPTATIVE MOOD.

92225 8009 mono 28७०2 Sin. = ८58४४ assa , assa, or siyd

900008 99०००0० ॐ] ०५ Plu. ५554122 ^ assatha assy siyun

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Sin. 0572८ 1. 1 atthu Plu. asma atthe santy PARTICIPLES.

PRESENT PARTICIPLES.

०2202 203, 00 8

santo santé santan 2०५००१2 DOI DOWOS sanvdno sanuind samdnan REMARKS.

The Pali, like the Latin, makes the future from another root, but the Greek makes the future and other forms from this root which are not met either in Pali or Sanskrit. It is worthy of remark too, that the Sanskrit has two preterites, while there is one only in Puli.

Bhi Conjugated—Active Voice. 117

Bhii to BE; Anglo-Saxon, BE, to BE. Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Second Person.

First Person. Third Person.

29616 29028 ००043 ‘Sin. bhavdmt bhavasi bhavate Mole 2909 2003, Plu. bhavéma bhavatha bhavants PERFECT TENSE. ~© OI} 20 ORO Sin. babhuva. babhive babhuva ००२०५ 003899 ००३० Plu. babhivahma babhiviitha babhivu IMPERFECT TENSE. 9920 390060 | 82902 811. abhava abhavo abhava 399909) BIIOQ 29219 | Plu. abhavahma abhavattha abhavi * AORIST. 99०8 8 90906) 92006 Sin. abhavi-vin abhavo abhavi * 5०220049 9००90 99290] 99098. Plu. abhavahma abhavattha abhavun abhavinsu | FUTURE TENSE. 20800098 ००62०००8 298०००48 Sin. bhavissdmt bhavissase bhavissati 22९42920 2९6०००0० «= ००8००० 3 Plu. —_ bhavissama bhavissatha bhavissanti

*By an oversight this vowel was printed short on page 87.

26

118

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu.

Bhi Conjugated—Active Voice.

OPTATIVE MOOD.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person.

०2००५०& socougos8 ००० ०००

bhaveyyamt bhaveyydst bhave, bhaveyya 2०००००2 ॐ०७००७व2० ०ॐ०००००्ब्‌/ bhaveyyama bhaveyyatha bhaveyyun CONDITIONAL MOOD. 99228०25 9००85 9०006429 abhavissan abhavisse abhawissa 9००96००4 s900820000 © 009800309 abhavissahma = abhavissatha abhavissansy IMPERATIVE MOOD. 2013 0618 ००००१ bhavémt bhavahi bhavdatu 22010 20099 D008 bhavama bhavattha bhavantu INBINITIVE MOOD. ००६०१ bhavitun. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT PARTICIPLES. ००900 ै> D203 20% bhavanto bhavants bhavantan ०००५००० 0000959 200005 bhavamdano bhavamdnd

” bhuvamdnan (Middle.) FUTURE PARTICIPLES.

do8a00059 2280003,

bhavissanto

bhavissantt REMARKS.

908005 ds

bhavissantan

Kachchayano gives wn alone for the termination of the third person plural cf the aorist, but, in a subsequent rule adds, insu, @s used with it interchangably.

Bu declined Middle Voice. 119

Middle Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

F'rst Person. Second Person. Third Person. OIDCO ODOC ODOCGOD Sin. bhave bhavase bhavate O00 CQ 230 CQ eae) Cz Plu. bhavahme bhavahve bhavante

PERFECT TENSE.

००१९ ००२६८8६ ००२8८

७०. babhuvi babhuvittho babhuvittha ००२३६०५ ००२३६०५) ००९९७०० Plu. babhuvihme babuvihvo babhuvive

IMPERFECT TENSE,

8 | |

8० 3922029 9०90909 Sin. abhavin abhavase abhavattha

BOO BOQ BIIOQ BIIDO &6| Plu. abhavahmase abhayahvan abhavatthun

AORIST.

89200 3220623 99200) Sin. abhava abhavase abhava

992200४ 99290. 9००० olf Plu. abhavahme abhavahvan abhavu

FUIURE TENSE.

2283-5 2९8८0629 6822602 Sin. bhavissan bhavissase bhavissate 283००26 ००६००००५ 998000078,

Plu. bhavissahme bhavissahve bhavissante

120

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu.

Sin.

Plu.

Bu declined—Middle Voice. OPTATIVE MOOD.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person. ` 392009] 99306009 2०000 bhaveyyan bhavetho bhavetha Dds00q96g ॐ८००्वन^त) == Saco bhaveyyahme bhaveyyahvu ९. aweran

CONDITIONAL MOOD.

89000008 9०००62००0०9 3900820000 abhavissan abhavissase abhavissatha 9900800029 9०००९6००००4 s008o0dcg, abhavissahme abhavissahve abhavissante

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

3200 920200} 32009 bhave bhavassu bhavatan 2261063 22066) | ००० bhavdmase bhavahvo bhavantan INFINITIVE MOOD. 90809 BHAVITUN PARTICIPLES.

PRESENT PASSIVE PARTICIPLE.. | ०१००५२०१ ०२५०००२१ ०2५०५२$ bhuiyamdno bhiyamand bhiyamdnan

PAST PARTICIPLE, 037000 03009 2205 bhito bhita bhutan FUTURE PARTICIPLE.

०96०००0००¶ 2980003089 ००8०००५०

bhavissamdano bhavissamand bhavissamadnun

Hu Conjugated. 121

Hu to BE; Hebrew, Hua, to BE. _ Alwis writes this root with ४ long, hd, but Kachchayano प्र, niformly with the short vowel, hw. Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT TENSE.

First Person. Second Person. Third Person. 00096 00098 6000243 Sin, + homi host hoti C0000 00200 ०.०2 Plu. homa hotha honti

IMPERFECT TENSE.

$2090 ५०५९७ %०५०८) ७०५२५) Sin. ahuva, or ahuvan ahuvo ahuva 9०८4 BOVOR SKOQO|L Plu. ahuvahma ahuvattha ahuvt AORIST. | 9०५ 99000028 9००0058 9० 9900) 8 Sin. ahun or ahosin ahost ahu or ahosi 9००१५ 9900028 52०05) 288६ 9०००० Plu. ahuhma or ahosihma ahosittha ahavun

This tense is also formed on the base he. Ahesun ०००८००१

the third person plural is of common occurrence in the books.

Sometimes a nasal is inserted between the base and the ter- mination, as: ahengsun—THEY WERE; and the same form is met occasionally in other verbs.

FUTURE TENSE.

८८56 ३ 99) ound Sin. hemi hes heti GUde 00088 cud,

Plu. hema ` (< henti

122 Hu Conjugated,

FUTURE TENSE. (Continued.) Or, | First Person. Second Person. Third Person. 60.948& coos'8 2000328 0056486 Sin. hehimi, or hehamt hehisi hehite 00208 cusudle ०02 ०००५३ Plu. hehimu, or hehéma hehittha hehinti Or, 6052486 6002058 602५8०8 ०५००५8८५ Sin. hohimi, or hohadmi 1000152 110104४ 6005080 0092069 ०८ह०नश = ००००५ Plu. hohima, or hohama hohittha hohinti

These three forms of the future are made six, by inserting ssa between each base and termination, thus:

60020098 60000908 02048 Sin. hessdmt hessasi hessate 42209 @0000090 ०००५०

Plu, hessama hessattha hessanti

In like manner the tense is conjugated on the bases hehi, and hohi, as:

6०000234 ©0520492248 hehissati HE WILL BE. hohissati HE WILL BE. OPTATIVE MOOD.

evdug>8 ०००५2258 ०८.०५२

Sin. heyydme | , heyydsi heyya ०८००१2५ ¢“ ०.०० >© ०८००य्‌/

Plu. heyydma, or heyyan heyyattha heyyun The optative mood, as met in the books in Burmah, is usu-

ally made on the base asa. Alwis says he has not found the

form given above in the books on Buddhism.

Hu Conjugated. 123

OPTATIVE MOOD (Con tinued.)

Or, ८१००५३०६ ५९००५२०8 ८१००८ Sin. = huveyydmi huveyydst huveyya Opsougzse ==. EgsougisgRn ५१००५०५ Plu. huveyyama = ` huveyyditha huveyyun

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 0080088 = %90९6222 92078402

Sin. ahavissan ahavisse ahavissa 990080009 sxv0800500 9900800803 Plu. ahavissahma ahavissatha ahavissansu

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

6226 ०22 ००००००१ ` Sin. hom hohi hotu 8 ०, 00028 0००००25. |

Plu. homa hottha hontu INFINITIVE MOOD. 0202 hutun CONTINUATIVE PARTICIPLE.

02039 020299 hulwd, or hutwdna

Middle Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD. IMPERFECT TENSE.

z ४ 2 [1 प 3098 ७०५२० 9०.2०8. Sin. ` ahuvin ahuvase ahucuttha 9०५०५००० 90० g 8902090} Plu. ahuvahmase ahuvahvan ahuvatthun PAST PARTICIPLE. 09 3099 09929 ॐ hute huia 1१८. ar

2

124 Gamu Conjugated.

§ 206. Gamu to Go; English, cana to Go.

गम. gam, substitutes for its final in “the special tenses” च्छ्‌ # chchh, says Max Miiller. In Pali this substitution is not confin ed to the special tenses. Kachchayano gives examples in the fu- ture, the conditional, and the aorist, which do not belong to the special or conjugational tenses. The same tense or mood is often

conjugated on both bases. The following are specimens:

Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD.

AORIST. First Person. Second Person. Third Person. 22 a oN ~ 08 9०००2 ०००६ Sin. (८० agachchho agachchht WOO ( ~¬ १ 8.9 209,99 ००062. | Pla. = agachchhihind agachchhattha agachchhun Also, e x08 9०0००५० 9०08 Sin. = (८0400 ayamo again? &> 0०4 FOOW BOG Plu. agamahma agamattha agamun FUTURE TENSE. 08 00003 08 c0008 08 oodd3 Sin. —_ gachchhissami gachchhissast gachchhissate Also, 06०24 ०6०००28 08०24 (10011185 41118 gamissust gamissate

Kachchayano gives a third base, ghamma. which does not ap-

pear in Sanskrit.

The following are examples in the imperative.

९०56 20903 20309 Sin. = ghammani ghammaha ghamnaty 026 0० ०५० gamdiue gamahi gamatu 098 > 2 gachehhaine guchehhahi gachchhute

Disa, Nyd, and Bri Conjugated. 125 Disa, or Dakhha to sez; Greek, DEIK—NUMI, CAUSE TO SEE. § 207. In Sanskrit,dris substitutes pas in the “special tenses,”’

but in Pali disa is also used, and there are moods or tenses form- | ed on the six following bases:

8०० 8029 502 8 ॐ = ०००० disa dissa dassa dakkha dachchha passa The following examples are in the active voice, and indicative mood. PRESENT TENSE.

80५ Bann 80303 ` 303 ८2८8

disati dissate dakkhatt dachchhati _passati “He 8668. BgOoo adassa, Imperfect,—HE saw. Cont. part. diswa Sogo

Nya to KNow; Greek, GNo to KNOW. § 208. The Sanskrit irregular verbs appear to be more regular than the corresponding ones in Pali. This verb in Sanskrit has two bases only, while in Pali it has four, as:

@ poo ® ॐ $> nyd ja jan nd PRESENT TENSE. M9390 १०००८ janati = nayati HE KNOWS. । OPTATIVE MOOD. 2० FOU ७०2० @OS0d9 janeyya janyad janiyd

‘““He may know”.

Bru to speak; English, BRUIT to REPORT. § 209. This imperfect verb substitutes dha for its base in the perfect tense, as:

PRESENT TENSE AORIST. (28५ (@ ००46 ००६० bractti bravinti—HE SAYS-THEY SAY abruvt. abravun—SaID

PERFECT TENSE, 9900 009 RDOQIQ

~ dha ahu adhansum—HE SAID. THEY SAID—THEY SAID.

126 Vacha, Vada, Jara, and Mara Conjugated. Vacha to speak; Latin, voco to cath

§ 210. The verb vacha has three bases, vacha, vakkha and u- cha. The Sanskrit pres. passive is formed from ucha, but in Palj more usually from vacha, though both forms are used, as:

Active Voice. PRESENT TENSE.

00308 OORIO vakkhami, vakkhama—t SAY, WE SAY.

IMPERFECT TENSE.

LP 200) >> = avachd, avachi—HE SAID, THEY SAID,

~ AORIST.

326010 82601 avocha, ००८१४ घए SAID, THEY SAID.

Passive Voice. PRESENT TENSE.

०{&०^~> 01903 CR°O? —wuchehate, vuchchati, uchchte. “It is said.”

098

§ 211. The last consonant of the root vada to SPEAK some- times becomes jj, a change that does not appear to be made in Sanskrit.

०&25 > ००&6 ०086 vajjdmi, vadamt, vajjemt, vadema “T speak, or say.” OPTATIVE MOOD.

OC ROY OSSOY vajjeyya, vadeyga—HE MAY SPEAK.

०.५] § 212. The 100४ jara to GRow oLD, is sometimes changed to

jira, jlyya, and jiya, as:

8० Bq Bood3 jivati, jiyyati, giyati— GROWS OLD | ७५

§ 218. The root mara to DIE, is occasionally changed to mi-

yO, aS : Sood 0903 miyati, marati—- HE DIES.

The intermediate ४ 127

R02

§ 214. Sometimes su in isu to wisn, is changed to chchha. Tn Sanskrit this change is regularly made in “the special tenses”’, but in Pali the change is represented as a matter of choice, thus:

R93 Goods whchhati, esatt—HE WISHES. ~न § 215. Yamu, to RESTRAIN, sometimes changes its last radical to chchha. Alwis writes yama, nearer the Sanskrit yam. With the preposition ni, it signifies to “be permanent, to observe”, while its Singalese definition, according to Alwis, is ‘“regulates.”’

००९2. ०००५० niyachchhatt = १४५११९०१ OBSERVES. 8]

§ 216. In Da to aive, are several irregularities met in read- ing or noted by Kachchayano. The passive is sometimes made like the Sanskrit, diyate, and sometimes like the third conjugation, d’- yati: and similar double forms are found with other verbs. The dé not only becomes di occasionally, but also de. In one instance the base appears to be changed to daha, and the present tense is sometimes made from dam. The following are examples:

9 s¢3 S38 | 89 dgjjamt, dammami, dahmi—1 GIVE. SOQ BCSOY dajjeyya dadeyya—HE MAY GIVE, 80003 8०५०0०9 diyatt, diyate—iT 718 GIVEN. Miscellaneous Anomalies.

§ 217. The characteristic ssa of the future tense is sometimes omitted.

§ 218. The a augment of the imperfect and aorist tenses, and the conditional mood, is frequently omitted. |

§ 219. The affix which marks the second person singular of the imperative mood sometimes take d before it, is sometimes omitted.

§ 220. ‘The intermediate 7,”says Max Muller,” which has to be inserted between the verbal base and the terminations originally beginning with consonants”, in the unmodified tenses, furnishes “one of the most difficult chapters of Sauskrit grammar.” Kach-

ehayano disposes of the whole subject in the following sentence

«नू the non-conjugational tenses the letter ४ comes 28

128 Participles present, past, and future.

Participles. In both form and usage the Pali participles are nearly iden- tical with the Sanskrit.

Active Voice. PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

§ 221. The present participle may be formed from the third person plural of the present tense, by changing the anti to an. In Sanskrit the change is to at. = For the declension, see § 112.

FUTURE PARTICIPLE,

§ 222. The future participle may be made from the third per- son plural of the future tense, by the same change that makes the present. See § 178.

Kachchayano however makes this participle also by omitting

the ss of the future tense, leaving the form of the present. Thus he gives

MISQYIZHO CME|ICPI = प्राणत, kardno—HWE WHO WILL DO

PERFECT PARTICIPLE. § 223. The perfect participle active is formed by adding vd to the past participle passive. For the declension, see § 111.

Middle and Passive Voices. PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

§ 224. The present participle is formed by changing the ter mination of the third person plural of the present tense, ante, in- to amana.

This same form is used by Kachchayano for both the pre- sent and future tenses, and sometimes in an active signification as well as in a middle and passive. It is declined like the ex- amples in § 89, 90, Yo.

PAST PARTICIPLE.

§ 225. The past participle is formed by adding ४0५ to the root, or in some instances na. It is frequently used as a finite verb. The declension is the sanie as the present participle noted above.

Kachchuyato has another past participle, but not of common vccurrence, made from this by the addition of dvt, as:

¬ ~ Q 299308 ^ [24098 1111110 cusildvi— EATEN— REMAI NED

The passive past participle. 129

The past participle is rarely formed by simply adding ta to the root unchanged, as:

९०? ita GONE Povo nydta KNOWN Boo bhita FEARED

§ 226. Sometimes an intermediate 7 is found between the root and the affix. (a.) In some instances no farther change is made, as:

0090 009800 990 9०809 ydcha to ASK, ydchita. part. asa to EAT, asita, part. OO ६०2 . ॐॐ 9924809 pacha ... COOK, pachita,... bhasa SPEAK, 014571८2, 0000 (2800 ` ० ०209 hasa, ... REJOICE, hasita bs rakkha, ... GUARD, rakkhita ... 2000 20802 os ७६००

upasa . . . APPROACH, upastta, ... mada, ... MADDEN, madita, ...

(b.) Occasionly the penultimate vowel of the root is lengthen- ed, sometimes as in § 187. As

28 20०५802 8० esos

8) ... SLEEP, sayita, = ,,, disa ... PREACH, desita, sie (c.) Certain verbs with final द change it to ५, as:

&) &०ॐ ©) ` 809

thé ... STAND, thita, ... pd ... DRINK, pitu,

§ 227. More usually no intermediate 7 occurs. (a.) Some roots drop a final nasal before ta, as:

| 2१०५ 24००9 २०५०४ 2०00209

sugamu ... GO WELL, sugata,... wpahana.,, DESTROY upuhala .., mand ... MIND, mata ... 201110८ ... ENJOY, rata

` (ए.) Occasionally when a final nasal is rejected, the preceding vowel is lengthened, as:

aS @loo ५० (5)

1110 ,,, BEAR, 14 ... huna, ... KILL, 140 ५

130 Chamges of the partwipial t.

(c.) Roots with a final ch, or j, usually change that letter to t, before the ४ of the participle, as:

So ee San Oo O193

sicha, tO POUR, sitta, part. vacha, to SPEAK, vutta, part. 880 886 22० 2269 vivicha. ... SOLITARY, vivittu, ... bhuja, BAT, bhutta, ... O@ 083 OQ ^~ chaja, ... ABANDON, chatta, ... yuja, ... UNITE, yutta,

(d.) Occasionally the ¢ of the participle is changed to the pa- latal of the root, as:

30 #8

nacha, t0 DANCE, 2achcha, part.

(e.) A final p is dropped, .and the ¢ is doubled, as:

080 ०8 25020 2 $3

lipa ... SMEAR, litta, ... santapa, ... BURN sartatta ,. २५० 2283 290-2398 supa, ... SLEEP, sulla ... sugupa, ... HIDE, sugutta, ...

(¢) In some instances the final consonant of the root is drop- ped, and the participle is written tha, as: ।

स्र ९8 ००० Bg

pachchha, ... A&8K, putha, ... YOja, ... OFFER, witha, ses 0०२ ०५ 83 95 VAS, ... DWELL, vatha, ... dist, ... SBE, ditha, = ,,,

न १8

macha, to DANCE, = श्ल) part.

(¢ .) Sometimes the participial क becomes dh before dh, and dh before d, and bh, as: ५० a8 229 ००४

budha,... KNow, buddha, ... labha, :.. opTAIN, laddha, ..,

The passive past participle m na. 131 (१) Certain roots ending in m2, or mu, chanze their final to m before the participial ४ as: ९००५ ९255. 28००५ 20005, vibhamu, to TURN, vibbhania, part. sangamtu, 10 ७0 sakanta, part.

og 29, ॐन्‌ 293,

khanwu, ... DIG khanta, ... samu, to QUIET, santa, kek 8० 3 ae! ^ _damu ,., TAME, dunta, ... VaMU, ... VOMIT, vanta,

(४.) In some instances a final r is rejected before the partici- pial ४, as;

८02 00209 8394 82902 pakara, ... DO pakata, ... visard, ... GO, wvisata,

(.) When the intermediate 7 is used, the final r, or nasal is not rejected, as: 09 069 294] 29909 “gan, ... GO, gamita, ... sara, ... REMEMBER, sariia, ...

(l,) Before a few roots with final 4 the participial ¢ is chan- ged to ¢ ‘as:

RWS5QO PIS 02 212

druha, ... ASCEND, druhla ... gaha, ... TAKE, gahla oe OOO ©> ढि २५3 2 8

2404, ... OBTAIN, bahla, ... daha, ... BURN, dahla,

§ 228. Certain verbs take na for the passive participle instead of ta, among which may be noted the following:

(a,) Roots whose finals are d, d, or dh often take na, and n in the place of their final radical, as:

8s Ba os Yea

bhida, ... DIVIDE, bhinna, ... chhida, ... CUT, chhinna, ... १ १३ ५९ 33 gudha, ... HINDER, windy ... keidw, ,,. ALARM, Lhinna, ...

29

132 Continuative past participle.

(b.) Rcots with a final r, when they correspond to 7 a final in Sanskrit, usually take n, as

` 029 Bop ०६8० १6

tara, to CROSS, ४1100; part. parijira, to BE VERY OLD, paryinna, pt.

CONTINUATIVE PARTICIPLE.

§ 229. The indeclinable past participle is sometimes called the gerund. It corresponds to the Greek rarticiple when used to con- tinue 8 senterce withcut a ecnjurncticn, asin Lrke 9: 16. ८ bén “having taken” tke five loaves ard two fshes, “anablezsas”’ “havirg Icoked up” to heaven, He blessed them.”’ So in Pali:

०११०० && 02 Gerad qagcosd (ogorocqogs

sunakhe bindhitwa brahmanan rukkhato otdretwa OCS Oc ५८०] + SIC CORO ८००¬@ क 2 ९८५ OD sakhasandhare nisidavelua tigjanan daiuad imangata GOOD wali

“Having tied up the dogs, having caused tke brahminto de. scend from the tree, having seated him on spread branches, hav- ing given focd, he spoke this verse.”

§ 280 This participle has several forms, as follcws: (a.) Afler simple veabs it is usually written fwd, ‘wena, oF tuna. (६.) After ccomycrvrd veibs, tke ccutinuative ¢ffx is ccn 77 ly, but not uniformly, ya. § 231. The root is usually subjected to the seme changes be. fore twa as before ta of the past participle. There are a few ex-

ceptions, the most prominent of which is, that the causative par- ticles are retained before ‘wad, while they are rejected before ta:

0 ZOEC ORD vandapelwa—HAVING CAUSED TO WORSHIP

ODWCQOROD 14४४2८4 ve be DO Qe) OR ¬ puretwa ee tee FILL DOGO) GOOD 0 sanmohetwa Be eee BE FOOLISH

२३ 23OR9 unnddetwd ee Siok ECHO

Future passive participle. 133

§ 232. No distinction is made between 1004, twdna, and tuna: Different forms are often used with the same verb, as:

29020 ०१८६-१ 5001004, sutwana—HAVING HEARD 0022 0029 gantwd, gantuna— ... GONE

§ 233. When y is used with compound verbs, it is subject to the same rules as y, when united with the verb to form the pas- sive voice, as in § 179. Thus:

(2०५०००० ohdya—ABANDONED. 889 vivichcha—SOLITARY, ८८९ uppajja—BORN. Be) क, drambha—EXERTED.

3908 agamma—coME. O89 paggahya—TAKEN’ UP. § 234. In the books twa is often met with compound verbs, and both ya, and twa are frequently used with the same verb, as:

2093 © ~¬ ७०20 O29 abhivandiya, abhwanditwa y ‘‘Having worshipped remarkably

9928100 992 8५००० dddéya, ddiyitwd—HAVING TAKEN.

FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLE.

§ 235. The future passive participle is usually made by the af- fix tabpa, but sometimes by anya, ya, yya, and teyya. Some grammarians class these participles as verbal adjectives. They ex- press futurity combined with possibility, obligation, or fitness.

For instance: In a great drought the people fasted and prayed seven days, and still no rain fell. The question was then asked:

05" 2०5) (09 cy kinnukhe tabpan ‘‘What is to be done?” or, “What shall be done?” or, “What ought to be done?” or, **What can be done?” (a.) Ifthe vowel of the root be lengthened in conjugation, and the intermediate ६ be inserted, the same changes are made be- fore tabpa, as

० ००8०० 22० ०००2००६ bhu to BE, bavitabpa. buja to EAT, bhotabpa. 3] 310०6 O09) ००००६ NERY

dd .,. Give, databpa. kara ... DO, kutabpa, or kattabpa

134 Infinitive mood.

(? ) Sometimes there are two forms, one with intermediate ?, and one without it, as:

of HZ ०१००६ a3 BY = ०९०२१ manu to THINK, mantabpa, manitabpa. khanu 06, khantabpa, khani- ०५ 2» 8 ०५००६ 009 03,9 ०४०2६ gamu to 60, gantabpa, gamitabpa. hana KILL, hantabpa, hani- This participle is declined like sabpa § 110.

(c.) The base of the verb before antya, yya, or yd, is usually the same as that before tabpa, omitting the intermediate ४ al- ways before aniya, as:

७०8& 9०० 08 ०& ९००

०८८४ to LEARN, ajjhuniya. pada to GO, pajjaniya

99099 ४००००६५० ०29 ang Boo

8८ =... PUT IN, dsaniya. + kara... D0 karaniya.

& ००५० $ ०१०

४ ,.. CONQUOR, jeyya. mt... GUIDE, neyya.

029 ००268५5 8 3५७० 8०६०२ kara... DO, kdriya. disa ... SEE, datheyya, ditheyya po? ९००५८-"्व «Os OCRROY

nyd ... KNOW, nydteyya pada ... 60, patteyya

Aniya is written with along ¢ by Clough, as in Sanskrit

INFINITIVE MOOD. § 236. The infinitive mood is classed by Kachchayano with the participles, and it is formed by the affix tun with the same base before it, as precedes the foture participle tabpa,as

०४ ०९4 & ०००

jana ... BE BORN, janitun. ji... CONQUER, jetun. 29 ००००० ७2 ००० 80 ... HEAR, sotun. dhé... BeaR, dhdtun.

eS EDC acer

CHAPTER VIII.

INDECLINABLE WORDS. Indeclinable words may be divided into adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections. Adverbs.

§ 237. Some adverbs are formed by the cases of nouns, and have a form of declension, as: | 84 8००१ 8००23 chiran. A LONG TIME. chtrena, BY A LONG TIME. chtrassan, OF LONG TIME, ५०26092 ०५००० ` 0260939 purdto, BEFORE. puchchato. BEHIND, kato. WHENCEP?

CORRELLATIVE ADVERBS.

§ 238. Certain adverbs are correllatives formed by affixing a

particle to a pronoun, and forming adverbs of

Time. Place. Manner, Quantity. &28; . 9109 02009 0029 ae now da, Oy 4 tathd, THUS. tdva, 80 MUCH 098 ons\$ 2099 ००९ tadd, taddni, THEN. atta, tatra, THERE. 008) 0093 ५०९१ = ५०९०० = ५०00 yada, WHEN. yatta, yatra, WHERE, yathd, AS. ydva, AS MUCH

098) ०१5) ^© ०२९ 0906 274, kuddé, WuHeEn? kutta, kutra, WHERE? kathan, HOW?

0998) cos] 09399 99909 ००8

sabpadd, sadd, ALWAYS. sabpatta, sabpatra, ALL PLACES. sabpatthd, IN

[EVERY way. cans) ९०0 Gas{eg ekadd, AT ONE TIME. ekatta, ekatra, IN ONE PLACE. gop0s| =. g290009 anyadd, AT ANOTHER TIME. anyathd, IN AN OTHER WAY.

30

13560 Adverbs.

MISCELLANEOUS ADVERBS, § 239. There are many other miscellaneous adverbs, of which a few are here given according to the usual classification. (a,} ADVERBS OF TIME. 9०९‡2 cooqes wg 2०86 sxe adhund, _— etarahi, handa, sampati, ajja, NOW, AT PRESENT. (00 86) cslooo न्धि page IN THE MORNING. divd, BY DAY. dosd, rattan, AT NIGHT.: 20208 22 9१००००5 ©$ satatan, santatan, anératan, sand, PERPETUALLY. (b.) ADVERBS OF PLACE. es © ® ६० ROD 9६० 0:05 004४ ५८014, tha, atraha, HERE. tahan, tahin, THERE. @ @ © ०२०५ ०२३ ("पछ 29039 hkuhan, kuhin, kuhinychanan, WHERE? samantd, ON ALL SIDES. 925. 9०:22 अम४०० S900 antaran, WITHIN. antard, antarena, BETWEEN. samd, NEARe (c.) ADVERBS OF MANNER.

eds gop ८९6 ५५०6 0296000

ati, itthan, evan, hevan, THUS, tatheva, 80.

99 १११३ +

pund, AGAIN. punapunnan, REPEATEDLY. ndnd, VARIOUSLY.

co ५9 ono8$ ५०2

ve or, ht, CERTAINLY. kdmini, WILLINGLY. mudhd, IN VAIN. (d.) ADVERBS OF QUANTITY.

#१

9०4 go 9०८2०००00०0 2

uti, ativa, atisdyo, MUCH, EXCEEDINGLY. ‘an, LITTLE. (e.) ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION.

ॐ 2०2९ 00907

ama, YES, CERTAINLY. sddhu, sdhu, YES, AGREED-

(f) ADVERBS OF NEGATION. @ ॐ $ cp 98 ८० a, an, 1049 Nd, naht, NO, NOT. md, PROHIBITIVE.

°

Prepositions. | 137 Propositions.

§ 240 Prepositions are often prefixed to verbs in Pali, as fn Greek. Some of them are nearly identical both in form, and

signification. Thus para in Greek, is para in Pali.

pert oe pare wpo ४ wpa sun 5 san

The whole number of these prepositions in Greek is eigh- teen, and though there are twenty in Pali, the two lists might be easily made to harmonize.

The Puli prepositions differ but slightly from the Sanskrit. The final r in dur, and nir, and the final d in ud are omitted in Pali, but they appear in composition befure a vowel. The 7 in pra, and pratt 18 dropped altogether in Pali. |

The effect of these prepositions on the verbs with which they are combined must be learned from the usage.. They cannot be

adequately defined in a word. Thus 4, which corresponds to the Latin ad, may be defined by To, but when prefixed to cer- tain verbs it reverses their meaning. So dd to Give, on becom- ing ddd signifies to takE. The following are the prepositions: = ` 992 9०५ 8 sg ७०९

d, TO. ati, BEYOND. ५०१४, ajjha, ABOVE. anu. AFTER. 990 928 9००28 92७ 9०० (99

apa, OFF, apt, ON. abhi, abbha, TOWARDS. ava, 0, AWAY. ए ८५ a

uw, UP. wpa, ABOVE. du, ILL. १ INTO.

8 0 ०५ of 0०2

ni, OUT. pa, BEFORE. pati, pafi, BACK. pard, BACKWARDS. Ss ०६ 8 05 29

part AROUND. vi, APART. san, WITH. su, WELL.

§ 241. Some of the above prepositions are often used with nouns and pronouns, but, excepting क usually as postpositions. And there are other particles, that are usually regarded as ad- verbs, which also serve as prepositions in the government of nouns and pronouns, as:

138 | Conjunctions and Interjections.

WO EA एन 9 >]

adha, BELOW. antara, BETWEEN. wpart, OVER. pari, ABOOT.

e Oe G00 830 D900 ॐ4 208 rite, WITHOUT. vend, BESIDES. saha, saman, saddhin, WITH.

Conjunctions.

§ 242. There are very few conjunctions in Pali. All the parts of a compound sentence being so generally connected by partici- ples, there is little use for them beyond that of linking together the parts of a paragraph Of the few conjunctions in use, several are adverbs in form.

© o—o 28 8 cha, AND. cha—cha, BOTH AND. apt, pi, AND, ALSO. ५०४ co 8 35०९

५८८, che, cht, sache, IF, WHEN. hi, FOR, BECAUSE,

cé 60 ९५६

evan, 48, ve, AS, WHEN. evanhi, IF 80.

OOCOD9 COs 20022 COD)

yato, yena, WHEREFORE. 1८110, lena. THEREFORE,

098) 9900 8०००८16

tadd, THEN. atha, MOREOVER. athavdpi, AND BESIDES,

6) A—ol 09

vd, OR. vd—vd, EITHER OR. tu, BUT, Interjections,

§ 243. Interjections are not common, the following may be noted:

०००9 CO? bho, he, Ordinary terms of address. BCG}, Cl are, ve, Disrespectful GaCOO9 aho, An exclamation of surprise,

CHAPTER IX.

DERIVATIVE WORDS.

The roots of the Sanskrit language are estimated at about two thousand, and the Pali and Sanskrit roots are substantially the same. And it may be remarked in passing that the Burmese and Karen languages are formed from a similar number of roots, and, ifin other tongues they be found of about the same num- ber, there will be a strong presumption that in the roots of vari- ous languages we have merely the different changes that have been rung out of the original set of roots in use, when “The whole earth was of one language and one speech.” |

These two thousand roots are made into one or two hund- red thousand words, as in Webster’s English dictionary, by chan- ging their forms, or taking additions, or both. The added letters that form new conjugations often give different significations to the verb, and the prefixed prepositions have frequently the same effect as the formation of new verbs.

Changes in the roots, and numerous affixes are used to form nouns and adjectives. The penultimate vowel is often changed as in § 187.

§ 244. The last consonant of the root is subjected to such changes and additions in derived words, that it is frequently dif- ficult for the student to refer them to their proper roots. Thus:

© 2 OO (105

ch becomes k, as pacha to cooK, pdka COOKING. . 2. १० १ॐ

क chchh, ,.. richa ... DESTROY, richchhd DESTROYING स g 25990 200d

soe ४ WE ५ sanacha, ... MOVE, samajja@ MOVING. ॐ ति 08 Om

chehh ... mdh, =... gachchha ... Go, gandha opourR. णि (9 ^} =, (20)

j sex 4; she yun, .,. JOIN, Yoga JOINING.

31

140 Changes of the last radical, ¢ 35 208

mych becomes gg, as sanychato QUIET, sangga, QUIETING.

2 ८८ BQ । 40 6 षं क ५ ० TOTYG ,,, DESIRE, rangga DESIRING. 666 8 666 ५ 8 re a tti, te oe. cae ratty 666 5 666 >) 5 | th a, oh, eee ratha

S$ ९ 36

९

{ hes chch,... nata ... DANCE, muchcha DANCING. 2 7 8 33

d ` ae 12, ... द्दृ ,,. ALARM, khinna ALARMING OD t

¢ 242 208 chch, ... safa, ... BE TRUE, sachcha ‘TRUTH.

ae Q, ८202 ong)

chehh, ... kita GIVE MEDICINE, kachchhéd MEDICINE, 00 & 0200 ong) th si chchha, katha .,. SPBAK, kachchha SPEAKING. 4 60 ८0 O99

¢ 44. ऋक... Box, malla A BOXER. 9 ॐ ०९३ ०१९ d ae chehh, ... tuda, ... GIVE PAIN, tuchchhd GIvING PAIN. 666 @ 8s 8 g > sia oe . Dy .. © Vida, .., “KNOW, vijja KNOWLEDGE... 666 83 Ss ८ 98

mee sis th, ... mida, .., LOVE, meth LOVE. 666 xO xO ©3 08 og oa ६ tr, ... chhada,.,. COVER, chhatra AN UMBRELLA a

° & ५० ०१०७

db. if, ue buddha. KNOW, एक INTELLIGENCE.

©

dh becomes

666

Changes of the last radical.

> O|O

dd, as = ४१८7८ tO INCREASE, OD O>

tl, ... mana ... THINK, ॐ CODD

chchh, labha ... OBTAIN, 8 666

adh,

Q ०५

chchh, gamu ... GO, ~ ००]

0 ,., mara ... DIE,

04)

tt, ... vara

3 ed

... PRESERVE,

141

[९

tudda INCREASE. QOD

mata KNOWLEDGE.

lachchhé OBTAINING. CO &2

laddha

© OD

gachchhad GOING.

mata

०९8

vutta A GARMENT.

०§

mm, dhara ... ESTABLISH dhamma LAW. 8B 9 2०8

tt, .., 8८४ ... INJURE, satta A KNIFE. ॐ ०० og!

chchh, ... vasa ... DWELL, vachchhad DWELLING: € एभि ee

dd, usu ... BE TROUBLED, udda TROUBLE, क्‌ ००-&> 992क््‌)> jl, abhiisu ... DESIRE, abhijjhd DESIRING. Q, 666 ०2 ~2 hie chehh ... ee ee abhichchhad ,,, ॐ ge ag? chehh, . muha... DOUBT, muchchha, DOUBTING. 0 CUO Aloo

४, «~ gaha ... TAKE, gaya TAKING,

142 Verbal roots used for nouns, and adjectives.

§ 245. Sometimes the last consonant is omited altogether, as:

१०१2१. ०० १)१ 4 (> न्‌

turagamu to GO SWIFTLY, turaga A HORSE; from gamu.

०२००५ 2290 र bhijagamu ... CROOKEDLY, bhujaga A SNAKE;

§ 246, Occasionally, though regularily derived from the root every letter of the root is changed in the derivative, as:

00 (2509 999 vacha to SPEAK, oka SPEAKING, utta SPOKEN, UTTERED,

If words in the same-language are occasionally changed, by the operation of established laws, to forms that retain no element of the original root, it may be expected that such changes will often occur when the words pass into othar languages, and ety- mologists are therefore compzlled to allow “vowels to go for notH- ing, and consonants for very litt!e.”’

It appears from the above examples, that there is a strong tendency to substitute, in the last radical, a gutteral for a pala- tal, a palatal for a dental, and that chchh represents ch, t, th, d, bh, m, s, and h. But while the last consonant is constantly an evanescent quantity, the first almost always remains unchanged. Jt is the only permanent part of the word, and may perhaps in- dicate the monosyllabic base from which the root was originally derived

Kachchayano enters largely into the derivation of words. Three. books, out of the eight into which his grammar is divided, are devoted to this subject. A small fraction only of what he has written can be given here. To enter fully into the matter belongs rather to the dictionary, than to the grammar, |

§ 247. The verbal root unchanged is occasionally used for a noun or adjective, as:

© vama to VOMIT, © vama VOMITING.

§ 248. More usually the penultimate vowel is lengthened, and if the final radical be a palatal, it is changed to its corresponding gutteral, as: | OVO CODD OD Va GEO 0 pucha to GRIEVE, soka GRIEVING. ruja to BE SICK, roga SICKNESS.

Affixes ka, and tha 143

§ 249. (a.) Ka is added to verbal roots, after lengthening the penultimate vowel, to form nouns, and adjectives, as: ९१० pacha to 6007) Woop pachaka A COOK.

ly = ४० 2४५२) 0002 ~=—avaka == A REAPER. (8.) Ka added to nouns forms nouns of multitude, as: O% 229 = manussa MAN, ८ ९2209 manussaka MANY MEN. ५५५ maytra PEACOCK, ५५००० maytraka MANY PEACOCKS. QO9 29 Mahinsa BUFFALO, ("023 Mahinsaka MANY BUFFALOES

§ 250. Yaka is added to verbal roots unchanged to form nouns, as: | €] dé to GIVE, १३८० 0400८ A GIVER. 8 ९ vina to INSTRUCT, 8१००० vinayaka AN INSTRUCTOR.

§ 251, Ika is affixed to nouns, dropping the last vowel, to form other nouns and adjectives. The new nouns formed are of- ten denominatives, gentiles, and instrumentive nouns, but the ge- neral effect of the particle is that of man, with or without a hy- phen, as affixed to nouns in English. Thus ‘Net—man,” in Pali is “Fisherman,” in English. The following are examples:

QO jala A NET, MOOSOD jalika A NET-MAN. chdpa A BOW, €] 4 chapika A BOWMAN. 116) dwéra A DOOR, €] <] Ban dovdrika A DOOR-MAN. QoQ magudaMaguDA, Boga magadika A MAGUDAMAN. 920 ©} nagara A CITY, $ 4 ६02 24441214 A CITIZEN. 62900239} sukara HOG, G00002 Son sokarika A HOG—-MAN.

That is a man who kills 0088-4 BUTCHER. <> (ta wisn, | Ban रदत ^ winv-man. That

is one suffering from disease produced by wind, or flatulency. Boo tila szsamom, 0602 = व्यव + sESAMUM-THING,

That is a mixture in which sesamum predominates.

144 A ffixes ta, tta, tra, ‘ttta, and tha.

8०० vinaya THE VINIYA, ००३५809 venayika A VINIYA-MAN. That is a student of the Viniya Buddhist Scriptures. eg dhamma Law, = ^ dhammika A LAW-MAN.

That is one devoted to the law-—RELIGIOUS. (272(9) kaya BODY, 722) (> ka yika BODY—MAN.

That is pertaining to the body—corPorgAt. @pOO manasa MIND, @0903A0 mdnasika MIND-MAN.

That is pertaining to the mind—MENTAL. 0000 = ~¥achasa WORD, 61624 ०८८108४ एक WORD-MAN.

That is pertaining to words—vERBAL.

§ 252. Many nouns and adjectives are met with the form of the passive past participle, adding दथ, ita to the verbal base, as:

४ to 60 ita GONE. म | RO? ५० ० ४0 OFFER, ADORE, 0९02 pujita OFFERED, ADORED. Bs vida to KNOW, 280 vidita KNOWN.

§ 253. Tita, optionally changed to tra, is added to verbal root to form nouns, as:

<] 24 to DRINK, 5 063 patta, or patra, DRINKING CUP. ड] 4 to ative, Slap S1(69 ddtta, or ddtra, A DONOR. § 254. Itta is added to verbal roots, after the penultimate vo-

wel has been lengthened, to form nouns of aggregation, as: 0g vada to SPEAK, <) Sap vaditta THE WHOLE OF THE

SPEAKERS, Or A MULTITUDE OF SPEAKERS. lA 9 ar 5) tta THE WHOLE OF T ©¢ chara to OBSERVE, = 135 charitta Ww OF THE

OFSERVERS, Or A MULTITUDE OF OBSERVERS. § 255. <A few abstract nouns are formed by addiug tha to ver- bal roots, as:

७०] dara to DREAD, 5५0 duratha DREAD.

8५ damu to REPROVE, 3६9 danunatha REPROOF.

Afizes n,n, yana, ma, ttima, and ya. 145

§ 256. Many nouns, and adjectives are formed by adding n

or n to verbal roots, as: kudha to BE ANGRY, 00200 kodhana ANGRY.

OVO

१०० dusa to BE WICKED, cs) ०० dosana WICKED. Q pu ४0 BE PURE, 009 pavana PURE. ®> 84 to EAT, | gD ०० wsanad EATING. 909 ~ ny&é to KNOW, ~ 90 ACY) nydna = KNOWING.

6) kara to ACT, (ॐ १, karana ACTION, or

INSTRUMENT OF ACTION.

§ 257. Yana is affixed to proper names to form patronymics, as: hchha VACHCHHA vachchayana THE SON OF om ` ee Sra °

VACHCHHA.

§ 258. Ma is added to rootsin the signification of possession,

as: ४ 5) | E E CO go AN OX, COlq yoma A POSSESSER OF OXEN.

च ¢ t ष E y] ¢ T © va tO BE WITHERED, ] ८9 vama A WITHERED THING.

& ५ hu to SACRIFICE, COUDD0 homa A SACRIFICE. § 259. Ttima is affixed to verbal roots, after dropping their last vowel, to form nouns, as: 5) da to GIVE, 2५ dattima A THING GIVEN, GIFT.

a § 260. Ya is appended to verbal roots to form nouns denot- ing the instrument, as:

ku to BE BAD, 02083 ८100094 A THING THAT IS BAD,

85 vina to INSTRUCT, 68१५० vinaya THE WORK THAT INSTRUCTS. Sa00 nissa 10 TRUST IN, $o0000 nissaya THE PERSON

TRUSTED IN. 1. €, A TEACHER.

146 Affizes ya, maya, and eya, eyya.

§ 261. Ya compounded with the last consonant is added to adjectives to form abstract nouns, as: 5020 ०४ IDLE, ० ०प्‌ dlasya IDLENESS,

1m ¢ A ~) id T 9०८५0 ८०८ NOT SICK, B90 €)0Q] drogya THE STATE OF NoT BEING SICK.

§ 262. Maya is affixed to nouns, after lengthening the vowel, to form other nouns, as:

99002 ०५५. TRON, ८0006; शव + MADE OF IRON, Or A WORKER IN IRON. i. 6, A BLACKSMITH. ०१०९४ suvanna GOLD, CODIOGROVO sovannamaya MADE OF GOLD, or A WORKER IN GOLD. 1. 6. A GOLDSMITH.

§ 263. (a.) Hya, eyy, is added to verbal roots, after dropping the last vowel, to form nouns, as:

ड) da to GIVE, esugy deyya GIVING. <) pa to DRINK, ०५०] peyya DRINKING. (92 hé to REJECT, ००००] heyya REJECTING. ८32 md to LOVE, Gooq १९/४० LOVING.

) nya to KNOW, C200 nyeyya KNOWING. po ५९० र

(b.) Eyya is added to nouns to form other nouns in the signi- fication of worthiness, as; S005 dassana SEEING, 8००००१० dussaneyya WORTHY - 08 BEING SEEN. ०४१ vandand WORSHIPPING, 6 ४०१०२ vandaneyya WORTHY OF BEING WORSBIPPED.

(c.) It is added to feminine proper names to form patrony- mics, as: 08) ganggd GANGGA, aeduo १५१९७ GANGGEYA, A SON OF GANGGA quan) ruhind RUHINA, eq \Beanug} rohineyya ROHINEYYA

A SON OF RUHINA.

Affixes kara, ura, era, la, Ula, ila, and va. 147

§ 264. Kara is added to nouns to form denominatives, as ३ kumbha A POT 6] kumbhakdra A POTTER.. ०९४ ' ०२४५० ८32 mala = A FLOWER, @0000206) mdlakéra A FLOWERIST,

00 ratha A CARRIAGE, ००००००बे rathakara CARRIAGE=

MAKER.

§ 265. Ura is affixed to verbal roots te form nouns, and ad- jectives, as: | 8s vida to KNOW, ६१५ vidura KNOWING, WISE.

On masa to WEIGH, ५०१५ masura A PEA.

$ 266. Hra is added to proper names to form patronymics, as- ८0८} vwdhavd vipHAvA, 00 ५ vedhavera § VEDHAVERA

THE SON OF VIDHAVA.

§ 267. La is added to verbal roots to form nouns and adjec- tives, as: ०५ pata to SURROUND, O00 patala A MULTITUDE.

५2० musa to BREAK, ७०09 musala A PESTLE,

OR00 kusa to SHINE, 032000 kusala HAPPY.

QO maga to GO, ८९० manggala FORTUNATE.

§ 268. Lila is added to nouns to form other nouns, as: cos veda THE VEDA, 008 vedalla ONE WHO TRUSTS

IN THE VEDAS. § 269. Ila is added to nouns to form adjectives in the signi- fication of possession, as: tunda A SNOUT, 0 tundila, HAVING A SNOUT. ०१९ ™ ०१९ That is having a large snout.

§ 270 When a proper name ends in u, the patronymic is sometimes made by changing it to va, and lengthening the pen- ultimate vowel, as:

३ manu MANU, Q030 mdnava MANAVA SON OF MAND.

33

148 , Affimes sa, esa, a, td, vd, i, and ti, th.

§ 271. Sa or ssa is added to verbal roots to form nouns and adjectives, as: 00 ala to ADORN, 90029 alasa IDLE.

OF ५९ mana, or manu to KNOW, ८9 $200 manussa MAN, That is the being that knows good and evil.

§ 272. A is added to verbal roots to form abstract nouns, as: os mada tO INTOXICATE, OND machchha INTOXICATION.

§273. Td 18 affixed to nouns to form other nouns, as: a> jana, MAN, @SODO janaté MANY MEN.

§ 274. Vd is added to nouns to form adjectives signifying pos« 8688107, as: ०० gun@ ATTRIBUTE, A GOOD ATTRIBUTE, ५ €] gunavd

POSSESSED OF GOOD ATTRIBUTES—VIRTUOUS. ०३ dhana PROPERTY, 990) dhanava POSSESSED OF PROPERTY.

That is RICH. 020 Hea HAIR, 932८ ४९७५०८६ PosSESSED OF HAIR.

That is HAIRY. 0 «—dDhaga GLORY; 20 = एष्व PossEssED or काक,

That is GLORIOUS.

§ 275. (a.) Nouns are formed from verbal roots by affixing 2, as: | ५४ mana to REVERENCE, ५९ muni ONE REVERENCED, AN ASCETIC.

M0 kava to PAINT, > 8 ८ A PAINFER,

(b.) It is added to proper names to form patronymics, as: oladen vdrdna VARANA, 61००५48 vdrdni VARANI SON OF VARANA

§ 276. Ti 18 affixed to the same verbal base as that of the pas~

sive past participle, to form feminine abstract nouns, as: ५० mara to DIE, ८० «mati DEATH.

५ mana to KNOW, ¢) 8 matti KNOWLEDGE.

Afizes di, diso, riso, dikkho, ४, vt, u, and Ul. 149

§ 277. Di, from disea to sxx, is appended to pronomial bases in the signification of like, as

08 tdi like Tuis. 0008 ४42 like wuat. opa8 = tddi_slike व+. eo mddi like wm. 28 4४ like wuat? e8 edt like ‘war, 2908 sddi EQUAL TO IT. This affix is also written diso, 1050, and dikkho: 8c00 ६०००० 9०033

§ 278. (a.) Nouns are formed from verbal or noun bases by affixing ¢, as

029 kara to vo, 788 kart A DOER, AN ARTIFICER.

san danda A STICK, sop dandi ONE WHO BAS A STICK.

(b.) It 18 added to proper names to form patronimies of the feminine gender, as 3८ अय GoTAMA, . ८) ©28 0014010 GOTAMI THE DAUGH-

FER OF GOTAMA.

§ 279. Vi is added to nouns to form nouns and adjectives it the signification of possession, as: COQ Medha UNDERSTANDING, (308 medhdvt PossEssED OF

UNDERSTANDING, WISE.

$ 280. ©, tu, dhu, nu, and nu, are added to verbal roots to form nouns, as:

Bog bhikkha to BEG, | bhikku A BEGGAR. ५० hana = to’: KILL, ००६ hanu DEATH, A WEAPON’ 029 kara to Do, ००९ karu A DOER.

OD) ९14 to SHINE, ००)0४| bhanu THE BUN. ५ rt to INJURE, Gcjens, गष DUET.

GO v0 to Go, ००७७० venu <A BAMBOO.

150 Afizes nu, tu, dhu, mma, tya, kkhuttu, and dha. @ the to vRINK, CO १ 21४९100 WHAT GIVES DRINK, A COW ©) 074 to SUPPORT, ००१ dhdtu THAT WHICH SUPPORTS, A

ROOT, AN ELEMENT.

es he to ७0, C0009 hetu THAT WHICH MAKES TO GO A CAUSE. प du to AGITATE, 809 davadhu ANXIETY.

There are other affixes, as mma forming nouns, tya adjectives and kkhattn, and dhd adverbs, but the principle ones are given.

Some of these affixes are identical with the Sanskrit, as tka, and é: but others differ materially) When the Sanskrit affix has a final consonant, the final is dropped, as, ¢ which corresponds to the Sanskrit in, and dhu to the Sanskrit duch.

When the final consonant is dropped, the preceding vowel is sometimes lengthened, as w for vin, and vd for vat. Occasional- ly usage is not uniform. Thus mat in Sanskrit is sometimes gnd@ in Pali and declined like bhagavd, § 102: but it is sometimes ma, and declined tike puriso, § 89. Here it seems to be confoun- ded with the Sanskrit affix man.

The derivation of words is often quite dissimilar. Thus bha- gavd, or bhagavat, is derived in Pali from bhaga and the affix vd, but im Sanskrit from bhaga and matuch. Like differences are frequently met. One of the most note worthy is manussa, MAN. In Sanskrit it is derived from munu, and made to signify a de- scendant of Menu, but Kachchayano derives the word from mar nu to KNow. His words are:

०२००००००२००००० Og C903 5300303 ogcoood

kusaladkusale dhamme manati janatiti manusso BOSCO! ADaqawoa2OgGQ cu 0303 @d900BH 6) manuso karandkdronan manatt jandtiti vd

96300209 “aN menuee ‘‘He understands, he knows the good and not good laws,’ so [It was said. Hence] manusso. Or, ‘The cause and the causeless he understands, he knows,’ 80 [It was said. Hence ] MANusso.”’ For this definition Kachchayano must have drawn his ideas from a Shemitic source. = ` | : न्यो DE

CHAPTER xX.

COMPOUND WORDS.

Pali, like Sanskrit. is distinguished by its numerous and complex compound words, but the most involved of them are on- ly exaggerations of such English expressions as:

“The always—wind—obeying—deep.” *‘Tron-cotton—silk—print and dye works.”

In English the words when compounded remain unchanged, but in Pali the particles of inflection are dropped from every word except the last. Of necessity then, the forms that remain are the © bases of the words inflected, and not the roots. This is still the rule to a limited extent in German. Thus “‘sonne Taq’, “Sun’s day’, when compounded drops the mark of the genitive, and becomes sonnTaG, “Sunday.” So DENKEN wuRDIG, “Worthy to think of.” when compounded, drops EN, the termination of the infinitive, and makes DENKWURDIG, ‘‘memorable.”’

Kachcbayano makes the same divisions of compound words that the Sanskrit grammarians do, but to whom exception is ta. ken that they do not distinguish things that differ, the same com- pound being sometimes referrible to two different divisions. Vari- ous improved arrangements have been proposed, the last by Max Miiller, being the simplest and most logical, is here followed.

I (.) Governing Determinate Compounds. ~§ 281. These are sometimes called dependant compounds, be- cause the first word is dependant on the Jast, being governed by it in some oblique case. The last word is often a participle, fre- quently a noun, and occasionally an adjective. The following are examples.

sO0]00 OCOD 90105 06099 ` apdya gato, instead of apayan gato. | ‘*Hell- gone,’ Si “Gone to hell.”’

a4

152

g2005¢| 206 issara ` 6Tssara—done.”’

०००५१५०० १८) 1180) ‘*King-men”, ०९००० 9009 chora bhayan, *‘Thief—fear.”’

© © 2००५ प“ sansara, dukkhan, ‘“W orld-misery,”’

kathan, instead of issarena

Determinate Compounds.

६००००५० 0206 kathan. “Done by Issara.”’

gsp09yGeo0 ranyopuriso.

“Men of the king.” ०९००239 9009 chorasma = bhayan. ‘Fear from a thief.” 2929209 30g sansare dukkhan. ‘‘Misery in the world.”

I (2.) Appositional Determinate Compounds.

§ 282. In these compounds the first part stands usually as an adjective qualifying the second, or, in other words, the first is the predicate and the last the subject, as:

coluson ० ००८4805 03§ lohita chandanan. lohitan chandanan. “Red sandal—wood,”’ ©0902 ०८०८० ००5 ०0०4 maha gahappatt, mahan gahappate. ‘Great house-master.” § 283. The first word in these compounds is sometimes ax

indeclinable particle, as:

s8og, ०

saoGoo so§cuoo

nabhikkhu, or abhikkhu NOT A PRIEST. naariya, or artyo NOT AN ARIYA.

६५०५}

9102८100 AN UGLY FACE. 2१००८)

sugandho GOOD SMELL. ०९२५१००० adQ4o00

hupurisd, or kdpursd BAD MEN.

०९७०००ॐ ००००००४ kuasanan, or katasuanan BAD FOOD. 2990० ०209

kaasana, or katannan BAD RICE ०२७1००9

kuddsa WORTHLESS SLAVES.

Collective Compounds. 153

I ¢.) Numeral Determinate Compounds.

§ 284. When the first word is a numeral, these compounds are classed as numeral determinate compounds. They often dif- fer in gender from the Sanskrit. Max Miller says: “Tri—loki, fem. the three worlds: here the Dvigu compound takes the fem. termination to express an aggregate.’ The following examples show that the same thing is expressed in Pali by the neuter: B coo ००१ 808 ४४ lwkan THE THREE WORLDS. chatu disan THE FOUR PLACES. 03 3008 0g 06 ti nayanan THE THREE EYES. panycha vavan FIVE OXEN.

So also the Sanskrit ‘‘dvy—-ahah masc. a space of two days.”

is made neuter in Pali. Thus: 2095}105 sattdhan A SPACE OF SEVEN DAYS.

II. Collective Compounds.

§ 285. When two or more words are united by the copulative conjunction und, the conjunction is often omitted, and the whole is formed into a collective compound, of which there are two kinds.

(a.) The last word is put in the plural number in the gen- der of that word, as:

००५०४०० (Gozcne ०००0४ (५20४0 samanacha brahmanacha, becomes samana brahmand. “A Buddhist priest, and a brahmin.”

०००१५8० ०५८)०५) १० ०००५ ०००९०८१ sdriputtacha moggalanacha, =... sériputta moggaland “Sariputta, and Moggalana.”’ ७००६६ ००९० ०००९९९० ७०० ००@2 ०९५००००० कनि fae mt balanycha purakkacha mojuticha, ... bala parakka majutiyo.

“Strength, and diligence, and power.”’ (b.) The last word is put in the neuter gender and singu- lar number, Some of these Pali neuter compounds would be put in the masculine in Sanskrit.

0082 9००००००९ 0०085938 hatticha assacha. 5४६ hatti assan. ‘“‘Klephants, and horses,

154 Possessive, and Adverbial Compounds.

Many compounds may be put in either the masculine or neu ter, as: BICHIO &&००22९© WCAgGOD + sBCa@garde ajocha elkocha, becomes ayjelakan, or ajelakd “A goat and a rum.”

17. Possessive Compounds.

§ 286. Possessive compounds are epithets, or predicates, and are sometimes denominated relative compounds, because they are used relatively, and may be often rendered in English, by a rela- tive pronoun, as:

2 002990. 28820: chhinno hatto, becomes’ chhinna 10110.

“(That which] has cut the hand’, or ‘‘The hand—cutting-”. 299298 ००००००९ D098) 2०००००० sampunndni sassant sampanna sasso .

“[ Where] grain has abounded,” or “The grain abounding— 9०8[ ००००4 वु>०००६&2 881५8 १६०८००० ०९०६० ambun dhdreti = bydlabpo 671144८ chabpito kuto

५०००६ &{०१९ १६ ०००२०४० bydlabpampu dhara bindu chubpita kuto. ‘‘He who holds water suspended by drops that have kiss-

ed the mountain summits,” becomes “The holding—suspended— mountain-summit—kissed-water—drops-[god of rain. |

IV. Adverbial Compounds. § 287. Adverbial compounds are formed by prefixing an ad- verb or preposition to a noun put in the neuter singular, as:

OOD ० yatha vudhdhan ACCORDING TO OLD AGE. (2386 22 yava jivan AS LONG AS LIFE. 20 OQ 9 upa kumbhan NEAR THE POT,

- 5) f ° $ ¢ ® ETV =f E E 92 5.6] (3 292 3 anantara pasadan BETWEEN THE SPIRES.

९ ; ५ T E T र्‌ Bo, > tua pappatan BEYOND THE MOUNTAINS.

CHAPTER XI,

SYNTAX, AND CHRESTOMATHY,

The syntax of the Pali language differs very little from that of the Sanskrit, and beyond a chapter on the cases of nouns, Kach- chayano is nearly silent on the subject. To supply his deficien- ces in this,and some other parte of his work, extracts from the Pali writings will now be given, and the principles of the lan- guage deduced from them.

ARTICLES. The native Pali grammarians know nothing of articles, yet their existance in the language cannot be questioned.

Indefinite Article. $ 288. The English indefinite article a, an, French wi, Ger-

man ein is made in Pali by eko, ekd etan, the numeral one, and is probably the origin of the others,

Ecard प९०००० acago eg ०९७०९ ०००००१०० q eko puriso gahno dwe padhummant dharitwd ra- C909 (> 299 5 0008 nyo hatte thapest.

“A black man brought two letuses, and caused them to be put into the hands of the king.”

Eko is the numeral “one’’, mase. gen. nom. case § 113. but here used for the indefinite article ‘‘a.”’ Puriso. “man,” noun ist. decl. mase. gen. sing. nom. case § 89. Gahno, “black,” adjective a- greeing in gender number and case with the preceding noun § 110. Dwe is the numeral “‘two,” nom. case, agreeing with the follow- ing noun §114. Padhummani, “lotuses,” noun Ist decl. neut. gen. plur. acc. case governed by the participle following § 90. Aharitwd, ‘having brought,” indecl. part. from hara, “to take,”’ with prep. & “to bring,” a verb of the first conjugation § 229. Ranyo, ‘‘of the king,” irr. noun, mase. sing. gen. case § 108. Hatte, “in the hands, ¢ noun 70886. plu. locative. case § 89. Thapesi, ‘‘caused to be placed,” 3d. pers. sing. aorist of the root thd, a reduplicated verb § 204. (h.) made causal by the insertion of pe. § 200. Though not noted by Kachchayano, the aorist of causa- tive verbs is often made, as here, by affixing the aorist of asa, “to be’’, in the place of the personal terminations § 205.

35

156 Article.

Definite Article.

§ 289. The definite article the, Greek to, is made in Pali from the demonstrative fa, which is undoubtedly of common origin with both the Greek, and English article. It is used like the in the following sentence:

00839518 adeg] ५0०9 gocuooa8s = 990 ०००0

hatti = कव saddo mahd_ ahosi. atha maha ~> cago OD 2०8 ०१०६० satto tan saddan sutwd.

“There was a great noise of the elephants, et cetera, and thé

Great Satto having heard the noise.”

Hatti ddini, “the elephants and other things,” a possessive compound, first part the masculine noun hath in its uninflected state, plural in signification, and the second part is ddi, “begin- ing,” but used in this place to signify, beginning from the ele- phants, and proceeding to other things not expressed. Here the things implied from the preceding context, are “fourteen hundred carriages et cetera.” The word is here put in the neut. plu. nom, Saddo, “sound, noise,” noun Ist. १९८]. mase. gend. nom. case §89. Maha, “great,” adj. from mahan § 158. agreeing in gender num- ber and case with the preceding noun. Ahosi, “‘was,” 3rd. sing. aorist of root hu, anomalous verb § 205. Atha, ‘‘and, now,” conj. § 242. Mahé Satta, “Great Satta,” appositional determinate com- pound § 282. The first member is maha, as above, the form: which mahan always takes in these compounds. The secord rem~ ber is satta, ‘‘a rational being,’’ noun Ist. decl. masc. gen. nom. case. It is here used as a proper namMe-THE GREAT RATICNAL BE- ING, applied to THE BEING that is destined to become a Buddha. Tan, “‘the,’’ demonst. pron. neut. gen. sing. acc. case, agreeing’ in gender number and case with the following noun. s«ddan, ‘‘noise,*‘ the same noun as saddo above, but here put in the neu- ter gender, and acc. case, governed by the participle following. Sutwd, “baving heard,” continuative participle from the root sw to hear, 4th. conjugation § 194.

Were the first sentence to occur on an inscription, it would puzzle the antiquarians to understand it. Hatti ddini is in the nominative plural without a verb, while the signification of the context so clearly requires the genitive case, that the reputed trans- lator of the Pali books into Burmese, Buddhaghosa, rendered’ it in the genitive without note or comment. This is an in- structive example in decyphering inscriptions. A precisely parallel: case occurs on the second tablet at Girnar. Prof. Wilson says: ८. 16 use of the nominative case offers a syntactical perplexity, for there 18 not any verb through which to connect Antiochus: with the rest of the sentence.” He proceeds to object to Mr- Prinsep’s rendering in the genitive, but in which he 1s fully jus- tifled by the context, and the usage of: the Pali books.

Nominative Case. 157

NOUNS. Pali nouns have three cases more than the Greek, and two tMore than the Latin. Nominative Case. § 290. The usage of the nominative case, does not differ from that of other languages of the Indu—European family, as:

papjocea ०९१०१०० ०६५०००९ १8००५०० s00%qo08 २८/८5 ९14, kururdcha, ravthansd cha, nadivardcha, abhiruta. ‘‘Eagles, and ospreys, and sun—ducks, and comorants ring out

loudly their notes,”

Ukkusa, “eagles,” noun 181. decl. masc. nom. case plur. §89. Cha, ‘‘and,” conj. The three words that follow are parsed in the same way. Abhirutd, “sound out exceedingly,” nom. case, plur. masc. of the pass. past part. of the root ru with the preposition abhi, signifying excess. The verb is of the first conjugation, but the participle is made by affixing the termination to the root without changing wu to v, and forming the base rava § 187. The partici- P le agrees in gender, numter, and case with the nouns, but is ere used as a@ finite verb.

।

9०५ ०029 0५६०००० ०09 ८१८१. {९५0 10111 0५४८. “IT [em] a messenger sent to them.” Ahan, “TI,” tst. pers. pron. sing. nom. case § 120. Tesan, “to them,” 3rd. pers. pron. plur. masc, dat. case § 122. Pahito,

“sent,” adj. ncm, case sing. masc. agreeing with the noun follow- ing § 110. Duto, ‘‘a messenger,” noun Ist. decl. masc. nom. sing.

7 + , ९८ t+ m ¢> ७३८००००० 227 ८ 9" ‰(€€0 5१; Art tEou a an

Manusv, “a man,” noun 181. decl. masc. nom. sing. Si, “art,” anomalous verb wea, pres. tence 2nd. pers sing. § 205. Writ- ten in full it is as’, but tke a is elided by tke rules of pe: muta- tion on account of the preceding o § 53 (a.)

नै ५ (^^ 5 ~

MD POSED COD © क्की>५५-० ko namo te wpajjhdyo ‘‘What [is] the name of thy teacher?”

Ke, “what?” inter. pron. marc. nom. sing. agreeing in gender, number, and case with the folluwing noun § 127. Namo, ‘‘vame,” and upazjhdyo, “teacher,” nouns cf tke first dedlensicn parsed as ebove. Te, ‘‘to thee,” 2nd. rers. pron. Cative sirgular. § 121. Here used for the possessive pronoun “thy ”

158 Accusative Case.

Accusative Case.

§ 261. The accusative is not only used to mark the objects of transitive verbs, but is also used where fo would be found in English, after verbs signifying to listen to, to offer tv, to speak to, to go to, and others. Occasionally it is used with words mark- ing time and space.

016 00903 gévan hanati, ‘He kills an ox.”

Gdvan, ‘“‘an ox,” noun irr. masc. sing. acc. case. § 109. Hanati,“ he kills,” 8rd. pers. sing. pres. tense of the root hana, a verb of the Ist. conjugation § 178.

९०९ 02०0268 ghatan karoti, =€ makes a water jar.”

Ghatan, ‘a water jar,” noun Ist. decl. masc. sing. acc. §89. Karot’, “he makes,” 8rd. sing. pres. tense of the root kara, a veb of the 7th conjugation § (97,

५५ | १०5 ald 002 ०८/5० pirisan gdman gémayati

५.५. man causes a man to go to the village.’’ Piuriso, 866 § 288. Purisan accusative case of preceding noun §89 Gamuan, ‘‘a village,” noun Ist decl. masc. sing. accusative § 89. Gamayati, ‘causes to go,” 3rd. pers, sing. of the root yama § 206. made causative by ya § 200.

०8 ०१८००५३ dhamman sunati “He'listens to the law.”

Dhumman, “law,” noun Ist. decl. masc, sing. acc. case § 89. Sunati, 3rd. pers. sing. pres. tense of the root su, 4th, conjugation.

3° १००५७ buddhan pujett, ‘He offers to the Buddha.”

Budldhaun, “Buddha,” noun 1st. decl. as above. Pujeti, “he offers to,” 3rd. pers. pres. tense of root puja 8th. conj. § 198,

230 03 १५ 96 san patanti duma duman,

“They go together from tree to tree.”

San patanti, ‘they go together,’ 3rd. pers. plur. pres. tense of the root pata to go with the prepostion san TOGETHER, a verb of the 181. conjugation § 178. Dumd, “from tree,’ noun 1st. decl. masc. sing abl. case, mda for hma § 89. Duman, “to tree,” the same noun as the preceding, but in the accusative case.

००००० 80००० CYcorD — sanan Aigho pappato.

‘A mountain a yuzena high.”

Yojanan, (a measure of distance variously estimated at from 4 to 12 miles,) noun Ist. decl. neuter. sing. acc. case § 90. Digho, “high,” adj. 1088९, sing. nom. case, agreeing with the noun followe jong $ 110. Pappato, ‘‘a mountain,” noun Ist. decl. as above.

Insirwmentive Case. 153 Instrumentive Case.

§ 292. The instrumentive case marks the instrument by which an act is performed. It is often used in Pali where the ablative would supply its place in Latin.

“He reaps paddy with a sickle.” ddttena, “with a sickle,’”’ noun Ist. decl. sing. inst. case § 89. The noun is made from do to cut, and the affix ta, § 253. Vihin, “paddy,” noun 184. decl. masc. sing. acc. § 91. Lundii, “he reaps,” 310. pers. sing. pres. of lw, a verb of the 5th. conjugation § 195.

; ] 0 @ 0 a + # 20 k a ८802 2 पौ OQ Oo vasiya rukkkan tachchhate

“He hews wood with an adze.” Vasiyd, “with an adze,”’ noun Ist. decl. fem. sing. inst. case § 96. The noun is made from vasa to DWELL, and the affix 7, § 275 (a.) Rukkhan, ‘‘wood,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing. ace. § 89. Tachchhatr, “he hews, ” 3rd. pers. sing. pres. tense. 1st. conj. § 178.

९०५2१32 QQ 8 333 pharasund rukkhan chhindati.

“He fells a tree with an ax.’

Parasund, ‘with sn ax,” noun Ist. decl. masc. sing. inst. case §93. Rukkhan, “a tree,’’ noun as above. Chhindati, ‘he cuts.off,” 3rd. pers. sing. pres. tense of the root chhida, a verb of the 2nd. conjugation § 189.

०२०८०} (08 5४268 = utalena pathavt khanati. "परऽ digs the earth with a hoe.”

Kudtalena, “with a hoe,’’ noun 1st. १९९]. mas. sing. inst. § 89. This word 18 also written kudala, and kutula. Pathavi, “earth.” noun 2nd. decl. fem. sing, acc. § 98. The accusative singular of this word, as well as others of the the same final, often makes ¢ in the books, instead of in. Khaaati, “digs,” 3rd. pers. sing. pres. This verb is referred to both khanu, and khamu, but it is con- jugated like a verb of the first conjugation with final a.

©> [po qo ¬> chakkhuna rupam pussate

“He sees the object with the eye.”

Chokkhund, ‘“‘with eye,” noun 180. decl. 0886, sing, inst. §93. Riupan, ‘the form,’ noun 18४. decl. neut. sing. acc.. §90. passati, ‘he sees,” 3rd. pers. sing pres. tense of the root disa irr. verb § 207.

८ र 5 sotena saddan sunati ००००००$ 29g ०१०००2०

‘He hears the sound with the ear.” Sotena, ‘“‘with the ear,” and suhkdan, “the. sound,” parsed as above. Sundti, he hears,” parsed in § 261,

160 Instrumentive Case.

००००००१ Mg meqod3 kdyena kamman karoti [र “He does the deed with the body.”

Kdyena, “with the body,” and kamman, “the १७९१, as above. Karott, ‘the does.” see § 291. Printed 261, on page 158. RC © ¬< annena vasati, ‘‘He lives by boiled rice.”

Amnena, “boiled rice,” noun 181. decl. common gender, sing. inst. § 89. Vasati, “the lives,” 3rd. conj. sing. pres. tense of the root vasa, a verb of the Ist. conjugation § 178. ocg> 608 thammena vasati, ‘‘He lives by the law.”

Dhammena, “by the law,” noun Ist. decl, masc. sing. inst. § 89. 862 00८ vujaya vasatti, ‘He lives by knowledge.”

Vijaya, “by knowledge,’’ noun 2nd. decl. fem. sing. inst, § 95.

9००६ 9252 १००२ ahind dattho naro “A man is bitten by a snake.”’

_ Ahind, “a snake,” noun Ist. decl. masc. sing. inst. § 91. Dattho, also written dathv, and daddo, ‘‘is bitten,” pass. past part. 10880. sing. nom. case, agreeing with naro, The word is refer- red to danta, but it is the same root as the Sanskrit dans. § 227. Naro, ‘a man,” noun Ist. decl. masc. sing. nom. case. § 89.

०९०९ ००2०००० gdec) = sarttona hato ndgo ०५७ naga is killed by a garuda.”

Garutena, “a galung,” an enormous bird that keeps watch in the cotton trees on the sides of mount meru.—Parsed as above. Hato, pass. past part, masc. nom. case, agreeing with ndgo, and made from the root hana § 227, Nadgo, ‘‘a naga,” parsed as a- bove. The nagas are dragons that inhabit the regions under Me- ru. There are said to be four tribes, each with its chief, one of whom is called king of snakes.

‘‘Mara was conquered by Buddha.”

Buddha, ‘““Buddha,” noun parsed as above. Jino, “conquered’’ pass. past part. masc. sing. nom. case, agreeing with the noun fol- lowing, from the root ji of Ist. conj. jayats § 226, 227. Médro, ‘‘Mara,”’ DEATH, but also, as here, a name of Kama god of love.

९०.र०ठॐ ५०००9 OC 82 upakuttena mdro bandho

‘‘Mara was bound hy Upakutta.”

Bandho, “was bound,” pass. past part. 11286. sing. nom. case, agreeing with mdéro. This word is referred to both badha, and bandha. The verb is irregular.

-

Instrumentive Case, 161

09603) 8०३2 0692 yakkhena dinno varo

“A gift was given by a Beeloo.”

Yakkhena, ‘‘by a Beeloo,” noun Ist. decl. inst. as above. The Yakkhas, or Beeloos, in the Buddhist mythology, are the guardians of sacred buildings, while the Hindus make them the guardians of the treasures of Kuvera the god of wealth. Dinno, “was given”, pass. past part. masc, nom. case, agreeing with the noun follow- ing § 228. In Sanskrit this participle is made by t.

Vuro, “a gift,” noun 18४. decl. nom. case as above.

6010 ०८1०००७) ‡०००० भणण golamo natho

“The Lord by family [was called] Gotama ” Gottena, “by family,” noun Ist. decl. inst. case as above. Gotamo, ‘‘Gaudama,’’ noun Ist. decl. masc. sing. nom. case. § 89. Natho, “Lord,” noun, parsed like the preceding.

0202299 PQRCed tapasd uttamo “The best by asceticism.

Tapasd, ‘‘by asceticism,’’ noun 3rd. decl. neut. sing. inst. § 103. Uttamo, “best,” adjective masc. sing. nom. case, agreeing with a noun understood § 110.

DOSED 99०27०५) suvanne abhiripo “Handsome by colour.”

Suvannena, “by colour,” noun Ist. decl. masc. sing. inst § 89. Abhirupo, “handsome,” adjective masc. sing. nom. case § 110.

‘‘A crooked footed man is noticed by the foot.” Pddena, “by the foot,” noun inst, case, as above. Lakkhito, “is noticed,” pass past. part. as before from the root (वदु न. Khanyjo, ‘a crooked footed man,” noun Ist. decl. as before.

8 OOD con8cors QCRO pithiya lakkhito khujjo ५४. crooked backed man is noticed by the back.”

Pithiy@ “by the back,” noun 2nd. decl. fem. sing. inst. § 96. Kujjv, ४ crooked backed man,’’ noun Ist. decl. as before.

9०९ ५०००० ८००१९ १०५ OCQRO ada mdsena chetutta nagaran patto.

‘‘He arrived at the Chetutta country by half a month.”

Ada mdsena, “by half a month,” 1. e. ‘in half a month,” an appositional determinate compound, the first member is the noun ada, or adda, “half,” of the Ist. decl, both masculine and neuter ; and the the second is the inst. case of mdsa, ‘‘a month,” a noun, Ist. dec]. masc. § 282. Chetutta nagaran, ‘“Chetutto country,” a compound word like the preceding. The first member is chetutta, 9. proper noun, and the second is the acc. case of nagara, a neuter noun geverned by the participle following. Patto, “arrived, “‘pass. past part, from the root pada, used for a finite verb. In Sanskrit this participle is made by n.

162 Datwe Case.:

D. tive Cage.

§ 293. The dative may be usually rendered in English by to, or for, but occasionally by at, against, and from. The Pali usage does not appear to differ in any-wise from the Sanskrit.

9989029090029 OG} E2039 sabpanyuta nydnassa = pathanan katwd. ‘Having made prayer for infinite knowledge. Sabpanyuta nydnasea, “for infinite knowledge,” an appositional determinate compouud, § 282. the first member is the adjective sab- panyuta, “‘infinite;’ and the second member is the dat. case of the noun nydza, Ist. decl. neut. sing. § 90. Pathnan, ‘“‘prayer,”’ noun 18४. decl. neut. acc. governed by the participle. Katwd, ‘shaving made,” continuative participle of the root kara § 197.

080 @30000$ Yog) ००५०० pOgd3 deva manussdnan budho loke uppajjate.

“For devas, [and] men buddha was born into the world.”

Deva manussdnan, “For devas, [and] men,’ a collective com- pound, § 285 (a.) the first member is déva, ‘‘devas,” noun 180. decl. The second member is munussdnv, “for men” noun 1३४ decl. masc. plur. dative case § 89. Buddho, “buddha,” see § 291. Loke, “in the world,” 18४. decl. masc. sing. loc. case § 89. Uppajjati, ‘is born.” 3rd. sing. pres. tense of the root jana, here compounded with the preposition w. It 18 conjugated in the 18६. conjugation, 7 being substituted for n, and the p doubl led according to the rules of permutation, § 75.

pooo > WOOCOION 99०} ०029 DOGO 098 [BOOS mamo. tassa bhagavato arahato samma sambuddhassa,

“Glory to this Lord, venerable, complete perfect in knowledge.”’ Namo, “glory,” 1०64. particle applied by the Hindus to their gods, as here applied to Gaudama. Tiassa, (60 this” dem. pron. masc. sing. dat. case, root ta § 122. Bhagavato, “Lord,” noun 3rd decl. masc. sing. dat. case § 102. <Arahato, “venerable,” adjective agreeing in gender number and case with the preceding noun. § 111. Sammd sambuddhassa, “complete perfect in know- ledge, appositional determinate compound § 282. the first mem. ber 18 the adjective sammd, “complete,” the final vowel 18 length- ened into 4, according to § 74. The second member is sambud- dhassa, ‘‘perfect in knowledge,” dat. case of the pass. past part. of the root budha, compounded with the preposition san, imply- ing perfection,§ 227. The final anuswara is changed to m before b § 83. “Samma sambuddha” is often used as a proper name. This sentence is written at the beginning of every Buddhist book, and is said have been first uttered by an assembled universe, when the first Buddha obtained omniscience. |

Genitive Case. 168 Genitive Case. § 294 The genitive case is well represented in English by

the preposition of, and though it may be often rendered by an o- ther particle,’ the -idea eonveyéd' by ‘of ‘ustally 298 at the base. OB ६०6) 9205 0०००७ १०००० 500898 kinnukho ahan tassa sukhassa bhaydno. ‘‘Why am I really afraid of this happiness?”

Kinnu, “why?” Kho, “really” adverbs. Ahan, “I,” lst. pera: pron. sing. nom. ease, § 120. Tussa, “this,’’ dem. pron. masc- sing. gen. case, agreeing with the following noun § 122. Sekhasea, “‘happiness,”’ noun of the same gender, number, and case as the preceding dem. pron. Bhaydmi, “afraid.” Ist. pers. sing. pres. tense of the root bhaya, Ist. conjugation, § 178.

०००० 89600990930] -0००००५५००१०००2००५००

Ye dhamma hetu pabhava Tesan hetun tathagato 4०0०>099०ह$००2 ००० Gd0) Savos000c09 Aha tesanycha wirodho = ` Evan vddi maha samano

‘The laws which produce cause, the cause of these Tathagata has told. And the extinction of these, the great Samana, in like manner has declared.”

Assaji, one of Gautama’s disciples, gave as a synopsis of his master’s teaching, the above stanza; which has been found in an old character, engraven, on images dug up at T'agoung, and in Tirhut.

Ye, “which,” rel. pron. mase. plur. nom. ease agreeing -with- the following noun 126. Dhaimind, “laws,” see § 292. Helu pabhavd, “generators of cause,’ determinate compound, § 281. The first member is hetu, “causes,” noun Ist. decl. § 98. and the second 18 pabhavd, “generating causes,” noun Ist. decl. masc. plur. nom. Case. agreeing with-the verb to be understood. Tesan, “of these [laws], dem. pron. masc. plur. gen. case, governed by the follow- ing noun.. H2twn, “the cause,” noun, as above, acc. case govern- ed by aha. TFuthagatho, proper name, nom. case to dha. Aha, has told,” 3rd. per. sing. perf. tense of the irr. verb bru, § 209. Some of the images have uwudchu, and the books give in paraphrase dha avocha. Tesanycha, “and of these,” the conj cha, “and,” chan- ges the final anuswara of the pron. to ny § 83. Nirodho, “extinction,” moun Ist. decl. masc. sing. nom. case, with the verb to be understood, as in the first line. The relative pronoun yo, ex- pressed on the images, is alazo understood being omited to pre- serve the mrasure. Evan, “so,” adverb, § 239. Vadi, “has declar- ed.” 8rd. pers. sing. aorist of the root vada, the augment ‘omit- ted, sce § 213. Mahé seman», “the great Samana,” appositional de- derminate compound, § 282, 293.

87

164 , Ablative Case.

Ablative Case.

§ 295. The ablative case is expressed in English by the pre- position from, but may be often rendered by on account of. ०2०५००० ०००० VQ 009d 8०५०० 7012४ pabhavanti panycha maha nadiyo. “From the Himalaya originate five large rivers.” Himavatd, “Himalaya,” noun 3rd. decl. masc. sing. abl. case § 102. Pabhavanti, “originate,” 3rd. pers. plur. pres. tense of the root 8४ with the preposition pa, § 205. Panycha mahd nadtyo, “five great rivers,’ numeral determinate compound, § 284. The first member is the numeral panycha, “‘five,’’ and the second mem- ber is an appositional determinate compound, of which the first

member is maha, § 289. the other nadtyo, “rivers,’’ noun 2nd. decl. fem. plur. nom. case, § 98.

2०20099 2१०००००० कन ५०५००००० Bd3cor00 ubhato sujato puto matito cha pitito cha “The son is well born from both father, and mother.”

Ubhato, “from both,” adj. pron. masc. sing. abl. case, agree- ing with pitito, declined like sabpa § 110. In Sanskrit this word is only dual. Swjdto. “is well born,” passive past part. nom. case of the root jana with the preposition su, and agreeing with the noun following, § 227. (b.) = 010, “the son,’’ noun masc. sing. nom. case, § 89, Mdtito—pitito, nouns abl. case governed by the participle. Cha—cha, “both—and” conjunction: § 242.

261930 MICOS Qegao urasma jato putto

“The son was born from the breast.” Urasmd, ‘‘from the breast,” noun 1st. decl. masc. sing abl. case $ 89. Jato, and putto as above.

02930 &००० ००४ 2282०06 kasmd idheva maranan bhavissati

“On what account will death thus come into existance here?” 05001, “on what account?” int. pron. masc. sing. abl. case,

§ 127. Idha, “here,” and “eva, “thus,” adverbs, A follow- ed by © 78 elided, and the anuswara is elided, § 77. Marenan, “death,” noun Ist, decl. neut. sing. nom. case § 89, Bhavissatt, “‘will comeinto existance,” 181. pers. sing. pres. tense of the root

bhi § 205. >८>2 ००2 {८10 rajé “The king from that [time].

To,, from that time,” dem. pron. masc. sing. abl. case, §122.

Locative Case. | 165

Locative Case. § 296. The locative. case is not found in either Latin, or Greek. In English it is usually made by the preposition in, at, or on; but it is often interchanged with other cases.

६०००० ५९2०० ©०१०१ CODIMEPAY ००००००० ‡०५१०५

ito madhurdya chatusu yojanesu sakassan nama nagaran

ति

“From this, Madhura, in four yojanas 18 Sakassa city by name.”

Ito, “from this place,” adverb. Madhurdya, “Madura,” noun 2nd. १९५]. fem. abl. case. § 95. Chatusu, “four,’’ num. adj. loc. case agreeing in gender, number, and case with the noun follow- ing, - § 116. Sakassan, ‘‘Sakassa,” noun 181, decl. neut. nomin- ative case to the verb atthi, “is,” at the close of the sentence. Nama, “by name”, adverb, equivalent to “which is called.”

9900009 228) १००५

antgate prydddso nama

०२५०००० DOQQ ९२००००००

kumdro chhatian ussdpetwa

GeEDICADD ©&०%2@० ०8०००68

asoko dhammardja bhavissati

0229 Od ०००१०५००० 68०6००० ००६००७० 80 ima dhatuyo vittarita karissatt

“In future time, Piyadasa by name, a prince, after he has been induced to raise the umbrella, will become Asoka king of the law. He will make the relic distribution.”

These verses are said to have been inscribed over Gaudama’s relics, as a prophecy of Asoka who would appear subsequently.

Two versions of the Burmese translation are before the public, and are given below.

(1.) “In after time, the son of a king named Pya-da-tha will

be created king; Thau-ka will be his name. He will cause these relics to be spread over the face of the South island.” . (2.) “In after times, a young man, named Piadatha, shall ascend the throne, and become a great and renowned monarch under the name of Athoka. Through him, the relics shall be spread over the island of Dzampoodipa.”’ |

166 Personal Pronduns.

| Personal Pronouns. | ` § 897. The followitig दण्ड Wubtrate the ‘use of the “personal ‘pronouns.

29092" GOD ०2०00609 | suvannan te dhdrayate “He ‘bears gold to thee.

Suvannan, “gold,” noun 1st. decl. neut. ate. case. Te, ‘to thee,” 2nd. pers. pron. sing. dat. cade-§ 121. Dhdrayaie, ‘the bears”’, 810. sing. pres. of the root dhkdra, 8th. conj. deponant § 198. 205 25] so tan 44४2, “He having taken her.”

So, “he,” 8rd. pers. pron. masc. sing. nom, case, § 122. Tan, “her,’’ pronoun as above, fem. acc. case, governed by the participle (क. | Addya, “having taken her,” contin. part. of the root dd, with the prep. d, § 234.

५ © KR 0299 ¶१०००० ०००१ ५१००० ang ००८५ 80 puriso tena purisena kamman kareti “This man causes a deed done by that man.” So, “this,” the same pronoun as above but used for the dem. pron. this § 122. Tena, “by that,” inst. case ‘of ‘the ‘same word.

but here used for that. Kareti, “causes—done.” 3rd, pers. sing. pres. tense causative of the root kara, § 197, 198.

999 09200 003 2१०2० $9000 sd tassa vachanan sutwd dha

‘‘After she had heard the words of him i. €. his words, she said.” Sa, “she,’” pron. as above, fem. nom. ‘case. Tassa, “of him. or his,” the same word, masc. gen. case, § 122. Sutwd, “after [she] had heard,” § 289. As in Sanskrit, the continuative past participle may be often rendered by after. 5) ०२१ ow ०8० ५५$2 ddnena me rammati mano “By giving, the mind of me i. e. my mind is made happy.” Ddnena. “by giving,” noun Ist decl. neut. sing. inst. case: § 90. Me ‘of me, or my,’ Ist. pers. pron. sing. gen. case. § 120. Rammati, “is made happy,” 3rd. pers. sing. passive with active ter- minations from the root ramu, and agreeing with its nominative case, the noun following, § 179, 183. ५५६ sis NaS प ६०००५ mahyan déna paramt pirissate ‘‘The giving virtue of me, i..e. my, will be perfected.” Mahyan, “of me, or my,’ Ist. pers.. pron. sing. gen. case § 120. Ddna pérami, “giving virtue,” appositional determinate compound § 282. Purissati, ‘will be perfected.” 3rd, pers. sing. future tense of the root pura, 1st conjugation, § 178.

Relatwe Pronoun. 167 Relative Pronoun.

§ 298 The relative pronoun precedes the noun to which it refers, instead of following it as in English, and it is usually गि. ` lowed by a demonstrative pronoun in a correlative clause. It is often used before a personal pronoun to make the latter em- phatic. । : ५५ 903 0d3e0089" 05 ०५७०००8००००6 yan dukkhan patisevibpan tan patisevissdmt

“What affliction ought to be suffered, that I will suffer.”

Yan, ‘“‘which,” 126. Putisevibpan, ““what ought to be suffered,”’ future pass part. of the root seva with the preposition. pati, acc. case

governed by the verb following, § 235. Patisevissémi, “I will suffer,’’ Ist. pers. sing. fut. tense of the root seva as before.

40903 yo, 0900398 oBdluo sag” 290953 २2००

ydtwan pire varsanta pi sigdya saddun sutwana uttasatie e e ® e

५० 0००० 03 08° sa3g0cQ90 ००० ००६००००

mahuu so twanvangan aniupatto kathan karssate

“And, thou a person who, dwelling in the city, has, been often frightened, when she heard the howl of the jackal, how will she do when she has followed to the Himalaya?”’

Yd, “a person who” rel. pron fem. § 126. Twan thou, § 121. Vaseuntd, ‘‘dwelling,”’ pres. part. fem. sing. nom. case, agreeing . with the the pronoun, from the root vassa. Pi, ‘‘and,” conj. § 242. Sugaya, “of the jackal,” noun, 2nd, decl. fem. sing. gen. case, § 95. Saddan sutwdna, ‘when she heard the howl,” see § 289. Mahun, “often,” adverb. Uttasate, ‘‘has been frightened.” pass. past part. of the root tasa, with the particle uéa denoting intensity. 9s, ‘this person.” Vangan, “himalaya,”’ the name of a mountain in the hima- laya, acc. case. Anupstto, “when she has followed,” pass. past part. of the root pada with the preposition anu, masc. § 291. Kathan. “how,” adverb. Karissat:, “will she do?,”’ § 291. This passage is instructive in reading inscriptions. There is an utter disregard of gender. It begins with the feminine, and ends with the mas- culine, where it ought to be feminine throughout. The participle, attasatte, is in the locative case agreeing with pure, instead of be- ing in the nominative and agreeing with yd; but in some copies the word is written utasate, changing the participle to the 3rd. pers. sing. pres. of the passive voice. Th2n again the verbs are in the third person agreeing with the relative, while they are sometimes made to agree with the personal pronoun.

0५0००05 088} ०७१ s0g0005 ogsced yohan stvinan vuchand adusakan pappdjemt ‘I who drove away the innocent from the words of the Sivi.”

In this example the verb agrees with the pers»nil pronoun, but it is sometimes made to agree winh the relative.

38

168 Verbs an@ Participles.

Verbs and Participles.

§ 299. According to Kachchayano’s rules, when a verb has nominatives of different persons, it is put in the first person plural. Thus:

००००० ०8५ 9८० ०४०5 ७५५ 0920 socha pathat ahanycha patham mayan patdma

‘He reads, and I read,” are expressed by ‘‘We read.” ०86 ०४ ००५० 0998 = ~ twanycha pathast ahanycha patémi

“Thou 1 and I read a

6

socha pathate twanycha patast ahanychapathdm ... °° ‘He reads, and thou readest, and I read.”

००००० ogd3 sore og ‰ 03g ०$०ॐ ०१०५ geo socha pathat techa pathanti twanycha pathast tuhme pathatha s009 ०००६ ahanycha pathdmi

‘He reads, and they read, and thon readest, and you read, and I read,” are referred to collectively by ‘‘We read.”

§ 300, Participles are of much more frequent occurrence in Pali writings than verbs, and the passive past participle is often used in the place of a finite verb. This past participle is alse used with the verb to be, to form, as in English, a perfect past, and a perfect future tense. Thus:

५३1९ ०००० 8०42 ०८8 १८८४१५४ kdtun ditho ast “Now has been seen to work, thou art!’’

Dito, ‘thas been seen,” pass. past part. of the root disa, § 227. Asi, “thou art,” 2nd. pers. sing. pres. tense of root asa, § 205.

O83] gacaso 8 gsi 08 ००९९ ०02० ००8०2०08 SB

1424 jujako pt iddnit madé aranyan gaté _bhavissatiti “Then Jujaka [thought], “Madi having gone to the forest will be, i. e. will have gone.”

Tadd, “then,” iddni, “now,” adverbs, § 238. <Aranyan, “ to the forest,” noun Ist. decl. neut. acc. case: § 90. Gatd, “having gone,” pass. past part. of the root gamu, fem. sing. nom. case, agreeing with the noun Mads. § 206. Bhavissatt, “will be,” 8rd. pers. sing. future tense of the root 20४, § 205. The final 7 is leng- thened by § 42 (b.) Ti, for it, the initial ४ coalesing with the final of the previous word. This particle is used at the close of a sentence expressing the words or thoughts of another, where inverted commas are used in English.

Inscription on a gold Scroll. 169 Ancient inscription on a gold Scroll.

§ 201 When two old pagodas were taken down in Toun- goo, in 1868, two gold scrolls were discovered with Pali inscrip- tions, one. five or six octavo pages in length; and from a silver plate with an inscription in Burmese, it appeared that they were deposited there A. D. 1542. The inscriptions are almost exotusir vely confined to extracts from the Buddhist Scriptures. As it would be difficult to find a palm leaf book one hundred years old, the finding of these inscriptions is like finding a manuscript two or three hundred years older than any extant, and possibly much older, for it is not known when the inscriptions were made.

The inscriptions instead of commencing with the sentence on page 162, as they would if written now, begin with

G@0009 83095095 Jeyatu Jinasdsanan “Let the religion of the Jina overcome.” ‘Let the religion of the Victor be victorious.”

Extracts from the Pitakapa follow, stating that the Buddha discovered the precise constituents of mind and matter, enumerating them, and tracing all things from nothing to nothing. One of these extracts is here given. | ० 9०९ good 98192" 29819 ogo 8९०00 avijja pachchayd sangkhdra sangkhard pachchaya vinyanan “The effect of ignorance was existance, of existance knowledge, %”% by 9 6९2०० ०&५००> १०५९९ १०५१० ०००० ००६००००० । (1/7 (1, ( श pachchayd ndmarupan ndmarupa pachchayd safdyatanan of knowledge mind and matter, of mind and matter abodes,

DO LIO00ONCBD 08009 OCS099 ©6509 ORO ००8 satdyatana puchchayd phasso phussa pachchayd vedana of manifested abodes contact, of contact sensation, ००४० 09099 0DA99 09409 ०&००० 2६4) vedand pachchayd tahnd, tahnéd = pachchayd updddnan of sensation concupiscience, of concupiscience attachment, ९६)85)† ०५०० 9०9) 990 &०५०० @2५ updddna pachchayd bhavo bhava pachchayd jati

of attachment state of being, of state of being birth,

170 Inscription on a gold Scroll.

@B 0०99 ००2 ५००९० = ०9०209 cso 403 १०0४ pachchayd jara, marana, oka, parideva, dukkha ०७)५१०००(५००29 2 908, domanssuppdydsd sambhavantr

of birth, age, death, sorrow, weeping, suffering, unhappy mind, and exhaustion.”’

Avijjd puchchayé, “The effect of ignorance was existance ; the construction makes these words a governing determinate com- pound, § 281. The first member is avyja from vijja knowledge, and a privative; and is explained as synonymous with moha, ‘‘that spiritual ignorance which leads men to believe in the reality of worldly objects.” The second member 18 pachchayd noun, 184. decl. masc. sing. plur. nom. case. But the first word, instead of being in the genitive case, is put in the nominative plural, as if iu ap- position with the second. In the other clauses it has the nomina- tive affix sometimes, and sometimes has not.

Sangkhard, “existance,” this word appears to be derived from the rvot khara to drop, and with the preposition san to flow. The noun seems to denote an inherent power in nature to act before the existance of matter.

Satdyatana, “abodes,” from the root sufa, to manifest, and the noun dyatana, a house or abode Twelve are enumerated six subjective, the perceptions of seeing, hearing, smelling, tasting, touching, and thinking, and six objective, form, sound, odour, flavour, tangibility, and objects of thought.

At the close of the inscription occurs the following sentence, added by the writer to the extracts from the Pitakapa:

801 0003 so08cgo ०88 ०००५ ० Boo

dhivd taphati ddichcho rattin taphati chandimd “The sun is beantiful by day, the moon is beautiful by niyht,

eg8cvss ooseg] ००५०8 = @0 0B" ००७० &०&००००

attiyo ` ganaddo taphati jayin taphati brahmano

a woman is beautiful in modesty, and a Brahmin in telling beads ; 9०0० 999060099)93" ५०६] ०2७८५ ००००००० atha sabpamahorattin buddho taphati tejo

but the Buddha, a brilliant light, was beautiful through all the night.

1०४८, “by day,” and rattin, ‘by night,” are cases of nouns used adverbially. 740, ‘ a brilliant light,” is a noun in apposition with buddho, and agreeing with it in gender, number, and case.

The praise here given to Brahmins, which the Buddhists give to Samanas, proves that this inscription was made under Braminical influences,

The longest Pali word. 171

The longest Pali word.

§ 302. Perhaps the longest word in the Pali books is the following Possessive compound, complexly compounded.

००००१००१०११५१० ०१०००§६००२९०२९१६०००००

०००५२०{००००० ८००० Pavara, 5४14510, garuda, manaja, bujaga, gandhappa, makuta, kuta chumpitd, sela, sanghatita, charano “The foot on stones which

are placed on the summits of the crests of the most excellent of liy- ing beings, the inhabitants of heaven, asshuis, griffons, men, dra- gons, and celestial] musicians.”

The base of this word is:

००० 9००००2० ०११०० ०३००० ००५९ 081९

Stra, cha 05014, cha garuda cha manujdé cha bujagd cha gandhap- ` 2८ cha “Angels, and fallen-angels, and griffons, and men and dragons. and celestial musicians

It is made into a collective compound aceording to § 285 ४.) and written

०>०००१०१०९९५६० ०१०००६६) strastra, garuda, 1२०1१49 bujaga, gandhappa “Angels, fallen-angels, griffons, men, dragons, celestial musicians.”

An adjective, pavara, is prefixed, and an appositional determi-

nate compound is formed, § 282. thus: ००००३००००१०१९०३० ०१०००8६1

Pavura, stirdstra, garuda, manuja, bujaga, gandhappé

“Excellent angels, fallen-angels, griffons, men, dragons, celes- tial musicians.”

A noun is affixed governing a genitive case, and a governing determinate compound is formed § 281, Thus:

५००००११००११०१९०६००१०००३९)६००१९०९ |

Pavara, strdstra, garuda, manuja, bujaga, gandhappdnan makutant. =

“The crests of excellent angels, fallen-angels, griffons, men,

dragons, celestial musicians.” | Another noun is added and the compound 13 = extended,

thus:

०००१०१०००११०९९०३००१०००8६००२ ९१०२९०९ 39

172 he lonyest Pali word.

Pavara, strdstra, guruda, wanuja, bujaga, .gandhappa, makutdénan, kutdni “The summits of the crests of excellent angels, fallen-angels’ griffons, men, dragons, celestial musicians,”

A-passive past participle is next affixed governing the loca- tive, and forming a possessive compound, thus: ००१०००००१०९१०१००१०००७६५२प्‌९०२०द६२०्पप६००२

" Pavara, कीर, garuda, manuja, bujaga, gandhappa, = वमू) chumpttéd. “Being placed on the summits of the crests of excellent angels, fallen-angels, griffons, men, dragons, celestial nmusicians.”’ “A: noun’ agreeing with the participle is now added, thus:

००१०२००००० १९५१००१ ०००३६५०२९०२९९१६००० 02806

Pavara, strdstira, garuda, manuja, bujaga, gendhappa, makuta, ‘Kouta, chumpitd, sela. ‘‘Stones being placed on the summits of the crests of excellent angels, fallen-angels, griffons, men, dragons, ce~ lestial musicians.”’

To this another passive past participle is affixed governing the instrumentive case, thus: ००००्०००१०१२५१००१०००४६००२९०२९१६००००० ccav3a5n0 8009 Pavarn, strdstra, garuga, manwja, bwjuga, gandhappa, mukufa, kuta, chumpita, seleht sanghatitd. “Are brought.in contact with stones placed on the summits of the crests of excellent: angels, fallen-an- gels, griffons, men, dragons, celestial musicians.”’ Another noun agreeing wth the last participle is added, and the

application of the clause is brought out by adding the relative pro. ‘noun and Tathagata in the genitive singular, thus:

००००१०१००१०९२५१० ०१०००६६५०९९०२९१६००००० ०००६० 80204 68200099909000002009 Pavara, strdsira, garuda, manuja, bujaga, gandhappa, makuta, kuta,chumpita, sela, sanghatita, charand, yassa, tathagatassa. “The feet Of one ‘who isa Tathagata are brought in contact with stones Placed on the summits of the crests of excellent angels,fallen-angels, griffens,-men, dragons, celestial. musicians.”

- Gaudanta’s ` 8०५४०११. £273 ‘Gaudama’s Famous Sermon.

§ 303. The longest discourse of Gaudama’s on record, is one composed.in-the.usual Pali-verse of eight s¥llables. = ` It.is said to have been. preached, at Gaya, in Magndha, on ‘“‘a-flat rock at the

-top of a hill, which resembles the canopy of an elephant’s howdah.” ‘The little mountain of the isolated reck,” mention by Fa Hian, the Chinese traveller in the fourth century, was probably the same place .” It. was. addressed to one ‘thousand snendicant..friars,. all. of whom were converted to Rahandas, at its close. Bishop,Bigandet says, in his exhaustive work on Buddha, and . Buddhism: “The philosophical-discourse ofiBudha 010; 6 mountain . aay be considered..as'the summary. "01 his theory of morals. It is confessedly very obscure, and much above the ordinary level of hu- -man understanding.”’ The original text -with philological notes, and ` a literal translation are here given. They may remove some of its obscurities, and make it more easily understood.

cog’ Bagcoss0 899 BoegrBagcooog’ass 85"

sapban bhikkhave ddittan kinycha bhikkhave sapban ddittam ` “Mendicants! All burn. What all burn ? Mendicants! "०० ०286 ५०००8 + ९८५ ककव wpa ddittd ` The eve burns, forms seen burn, ००8९2००० ०००9 = ` ००[००६०००००००० Begs chev 4 ८ vnydnan ddittan chakkhu samplhursso dditto — percention burns; impression of the eye burns,

` e08$eognogom9ges2 -29&००००५5०5 . yamidam ehakkhu samphassa pachchayd uppayati vedayitan 09307 $030) ००१०६००१३०) 03 8a08 gy sukhan vé durkhan vé | adukkhamasukhan vé tan pi ddittan the effects of impressions of the eye, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sensation is produced, that also : burns 99 The passage:might be rendered ad. ०९१०५११ thus: - “The faculty, of sight burns, cbjective vision burns, subjective vision burns, visual - impressions burn, and the effects of visual impressions -whether, - the: sensations -be‘pleasant.or painful, they. also burn.”

174 Gaudama’s Sermon.

००१ 9००9 kena ddittan ‘‘By what do they burn? ०००९० ०४०० ०५००० १ 9००8 rayagyind ०0500094 mohaggind ddtttan @OBo05 @०200० ५०००७ = ०००००००५ ०६०७००५६ {41244 jaraya maranena sokeht parideveht 4००६६५३ ०४।५१०००००६ 2७)००००००५४ 999899 $ 0818 dukkheht domanassehi updydsehi ddittanti vadami

“By the fire of passion, by the fire of sin, by the fire of spiritual ignorance they burn; by birth, by age, by death, by sorrows, by weepings, by pains, by mental sufferings, by exhaustion they burn’. I say.”

Adittan, “burn, pass. past part. of the root dapa, or tapa with the preposition 4, neut. sing. agreeing with sapban, but used like 8 finite verb, § 226. (८.). The word is used in the signification of aq tapa the corresponding Sanskrit word, which is defined by

Wilson: “To burn; (hence figuratively,) to suffer mental or bodily pain.” Kinychu, “and what,” inter. pron. neut. sing. nom. case § 127, and the conjunction cha, which changes the anuswara to ny by § 83. Rupa, ‘“‘forms,’’ noun 18४. decl. neut. plur. nom. case § 90. Chakkhu vinydnan, “perception,” lit. “knowledge of the eye,” go- verning determinate compound, the second member of which is wi- nydnan governing the first in the genitive. This word hss been a- dopted into Burmese in the signification of “mind,” or “soul,” and ‘mind of the eye,” is a very appropriate circumlocution for “per- ception. Ohakkhu samphasso, “impression of, or on the eye,” go- verning determinate compound, of which the second member is sam- phasso from the root phussa or phassa, “to find, to feel, bring in contact,” with the preposition san implying completion. As the word is stated to produce se nsation, it must denote the impres- sion made on the eye by rays of light proceeding from some object.

०००९१००९ 4121140 twekhyeng, is a Burmese definition of the

word, kt. “the feeling an external object of sense.’’ This corres- ponds substantially with the definition given above. The noun is jn the masculine sing., and the participle agrees with it.

Yamidan, ‘‘whatever,” neuter singular of the pronouns ya, ima, § 126, 124. agreeing with vedayitan. Anuswara is changed to m by § 81. । |

| Caudamars उठकर - र 62105 ०००8 1

sotan ddittam saddhd ddittan The ear burns, sounds bers,

hearing burns, auricular impressions burn, the effects of auricular impregsidris, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasuretess, -whatever sensation is produced, that also burns.

“By what do they burn? By the fire of passion, by the fire of sin, by the fire of spirftual ignorance they burn; hy birth, by age, by death, by sorrows, by weepings, by pains, by mental sufferings, by exhaustion, they burn.’ I say.”

०5 9०9०8 ago 9०० 9 ghanan ddittan gandahda dditia **The 1086 burns, odors burn,

smelling burns, odoriferous impressions burn, the effects of odori- ferous impressions, whether pleasure or paiu, painless or pleasure. less, whatever sensation is produced, that also burns.

‘‘By what do they burn? By the fire of passion, by the fire of sin, by the fire of spiritual ignorance they burn; by birth, by age, by déath, by sorrows, by weepings, by pains, by mental saifetiags, by exhaustion they burn.’ I say.”

801 ss08gg0 ०2०9 “seo SHO

jthod ddvtta vasa कदा

‘‘The tongue burns, objects of taste burn,

taste burns, impressions of taste burn, the effects of impressions of taste, whether pleasure or-_pam, painless or pleasureless, whatever sensation is produced, that also burns.

“By what do they burn? By the fire of:passion, by the fire of sin, by the fire of spivitual ‘ignorance théy burn; by bith, by age, by death, by sorrows,by weepings, by pains, by mental-suffer- ings, by exhaistion they burn.’ I say.’’

02200०9 9०879 ०७०9६ 9००82 kdyo ` - वव phothappa वतप “The body burns, tangible objects burn,

feeling burns, tangible impressions burn, the effects of tangible im_ pressions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, what- ever sensation is'produéed, that also buins. ^ what do they burn? By the fire of passion, by the ‘fire of sin, by the fire of spiritual ignorance they burn ; by. birth, by age \ 40

176 Gaudama’s Sermon.

by death, by sorrows, by weepings, by pains, by mental sufferings, by exhaustion they burn.’ I say.”

५०१० 9००8०६2 ego 9००89

mano dditto dhammdé dditta

“The mind burns, objects of thought burn, thinking burns, mental impressions burn, the effects of mental im- pressions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, what- ever sensation is produced, that also burns.

‘‘By what do they burn? By the fire of passion, by the fire of sin, by the fire of spiritual ignorance, they burn; by birth, by age, by death, by sorrows, by weepinys, by pains, by mental suf- ferings, by exhaustion they burn.’ I say.”

The original of the last five paiagrarhs differs only in the first lines, given above, excepting the occurienee of the first word in the terms connected with ‘“‘perception,” and ‘‘impression,’” here added, so that all the original is given while unnecessary repetition is avoided.

G20009 6९22 620०209 2०००००० 8010; ०८१८ ]/40,1४ solu 800 p hasso Ear perception, ear impression.

` ध्म 6९298 ९००१ 2०००००० (0044902 vinyanin ghana sum phasso Nose perception nose Imprassion &4 600० 84 228००००9 jthvd vinyanun jthva 801: hesso Tongue perception tongue impression 2000 ५9" 1 0220० 90RG0000 kaya viny adnan kaya samphasso Body perception body impression o> 6९९०० od 90900009 mana vinydnan mana samphasso Mind perception mind impression”’

Mind, according to Gaudama’s system, holds the place of a sixth sense, and no more of immortality is awarded it than the bo- dy. Both are put in the same category.

Gaudama’s Sermon. 177

&९०००& aBagco 99006] ॐ६५० 2990009 evan passan bhikkhave 80८1204 ariya = sdvako

‘Thus Mendicants! the sanctified disciple seeing, having heard, —

00g 18" ऽ ९& $ १०००१ 8 Se? $

ehakkhusmin pi nibbindatt १४584 pt nibbindatr puts restraint on the eye, and he puts restraint on forms,

009] 62०५००० 6 §&‰ ong, aogeood 8 $e’ ach chatkhu vinyane pr nibbindatt chakkhwu samphasse pi nibbindati and he puts restraint on perception, and he puts restraint on visual

oo8so OQ ००&००००&०० 3५001008 chakkhu samphassa pachchayé

impressions, and tl.e effects of visual impressions, whether plea- sure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sensation is produc- ed, on that also he puts restraint.

“And he puts restraint on the ear, and he puts restraint on sounds, and he puts restraint on hearing, and he puts restraint on auricular impressions, and the effects of auricular impressions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sen- sation is produced, on that also he puts restraint.

“And he puts restraint on the nose, and he puts restraint on odours, and he puts restraint on smelling, and he puts restraint on odoriferous impressions, and the effects of odoriferous impressions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sen- sation is produced, on that also he puts restraint.

५.4१ he puts restraint on the tongue, and he puts restraint on objects of taste, and he puts restraint on taste, and he puts restraint on impressions of taste, and the effects of impressions of taste, ` whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sen- gation is produced, on that also he puts restraint.

‘*And he puts restraint on the body, and he puts restraint on tangible objects, and he puts restraint on feeling, and he puts res- traint on tengible impressions, and the effects of tangible impres- sions, whether pleasure or pain, painless or pleasureless, whatever sensation is produced, on that also he puts restraint. |

“And he puts restraint cn the mind, and he puts restraint on objects of thought, and he puts restraint on thinking, and he puts restraint on mental impressions, and the effects of mental

1% हर्त्ता), Benda. | अक्का; whether plensure or pain, paixtess or pleksaretcns, whatever sensation is produced, on that also he ‘puts restraint. ९8 8०4 8००0 Baga nibbindan virajjat virdgd dimuohthh

Having put on restraint, he is exempt from desiré; he is liberated

Ba gao8 8०68955 22 ०0००6

vimuttusmin vimuttamite = nyanan hott | through absenée from passion. ‘Into liberation,’ he is-ltber- Sano aod3 02805 ५2११५

khina jate vusitan brahmachariyan

ated. There is knowledge. Birth is exhausted, religious duty is 0205 ००५०8५5 ७००५ ॐ& kathan ‘araniyan aparan natisr finished. That which ought to be done, has been done. Other things there are none.” Passan, ‘“‘seeing,” pres. part. sing. nom. case of the root disa, “agreeing with the noun following, § 178, 207. Sutavd, “having heard,” active past part. of the root su, § 178. Nibbindati, “he puts restraint on,” 3rd. pers. sing. of the root vida, 2nd. conj. with the preposition nt, इ 189. The v is changen to b by § 27, anJ the ४ 18 doubled by § 75 This form of the verb is defined in Sanskrit

` (नू consider, to reason.” This illustrates the difference in the sig. hification of the same root in Pali and Sanskrit.

Virajjati, “he is exempt from desire,” 3rd. pers. sing. of the root ranya with the prepésition vi, 3rd. conj. § 1938. In Sanskrit the root in the corrésponding conjugatiou signifies only “to dye,” and when ४८ is prefixed, “‘to be averse to dislike,” but in Pali, it ‘signifies exémption from both likes and dislikes. Virdgd, “absence from passion,” noun Ist. decl. ०088९. abl. case, but irregular § 89

Vimuchchati, “he is liberated,” drd, pers. sing. of root mucha with prep. vi prefixed, 3rd (णा. § 193. Vusitan. is finished,” pass

past part. néut. ‘sing. of the root vusi'§ 226. (a.) Karaniyan, “that which ought to be done,” future pass part. made by aniya, of the root kara § 235 (c.) Katan, “has been done,” pass. past part neut. gender of the root kara, § 197 ५, For translations of this famous sermon from the Burmese, see ‘a “O° Souriial Vol ILI page 06, and Bigandet’s Life of Gaudama

Ancient Inscription. £79

Asoka and Antiochus.

§ 303. The following inscription in which the name of Anti- ochus occurs, is given as a specimen of what Pali was ih the third century before the Christian era. There are a few irregula- ` 21168 for which it is not easy to account, but the marvel is that there are not more. Pali has not changed as much in two thou- sani years as Eaglish has in two or three hundred.

LSA SEAY beLULA ७७१०८ [कृ 99009 882028 c801$3u000 Su02ac8eg0 epegoo storia vyitehmi devénanpiyasa piyadasino §=rdnyo ५ 40७०५ AA LO DG hd A ५46 1

G008VS20009 09909 60797 ५) 1 caBuogeond evam top whantesu yatha chodd pddd sutiyaputo FAVE HKOUT HK LF Lire ०००००००० ००2० ॐ 0290608 930०2099 ०७००$ ०१० ketalaputo & tanbapannt antiyako yona = rdja 14८44 #;4 +^ 6४८7 € ०७० ©) 8 092 s$3200000- 95 न्‌) @2०}

ye ve ४ ६८5८ antiyakasa sdmanta raydno ~ ० 4 4 4 ०4 rel bid ८५०४ TA 28009 086}58999 2००9०80१ qep00 savata devdnanpiyasa piyadasino ranyo

bd t Stk ४ व &५ ०५८० cg 830020003 ५३०० 8098209 © 009 ६५8२० ० dwe chikichha kata manusa chikichhd cha pasw chitichha cha

1 044५-४ ॥ £ ५॥ 1५५

(©2००2$ © oY ५०००० oc, ®)

osadhani cha yani + =manusopagani cha {050 4}

180 Ancient Inscription.

71 11.11 10410701 ०८)§ = 0020902 १) 22009 0००6}260००9& © pagani yata yata nast. sarata hdrvapitani cha ४04८ £4 |

0००24 ०2)९ ©

ropdpitant cha

BVI dbvidbLALALA ५०५ १८००९ © ५८००६ © 0०0०५402 F108 D900 mulani chaphalani cha yata yuir ia. = sarata [८.4 [५7604 { ८ SIGISonN$ © ०न्‌<) ०९ o

harapitant cha ropdapitant cha = pe eee 2 9 9 LOdtbd TLLA bd d ८७८७ । 4 ०५००००१ 020] © &1$1&0०० cad) © caqadltooo$ pathesu hupad cha Ihandpitd vachha che ropapitans ॥ [५७५९५४५ 06699296) ००१ ©3955 paribogaya pasu manusdnan Savata, “everywhere,” adv. § 288. The double Jetters of the books are single on the inscription. Vijitehmi, ‘in the conquered,” pass. past part. of the root ji with the preposition ९८) sing.locative case, agreeing with a noun masculine or neuter understood, § 89. Devénan, “of the Devas,” noun Ist. decl. mase. plur. gen. case, $ 89. Piyasa, ‘beloved of,” adj. masc. gen. case, agreeing with the noun following. The genitive case is marked by sa instead of ssa. in the books, but Kachchayano gives sa for the original form of the genitive singular, § 84. Piyadasino, noun 1st deel. sing, gen. case, $ 91. In the bcoks this name instead of Piyadast, as here, is written Piyddasa, § 296. Rdnyo, “of king,” noun irr. sing.

gen. case, § 108. Hama, “so,” adv. from evan, the anuswara

Ancient Inscription. 18{

becomes ™ Lefore a, according to § 81. Ap’, “also,” conj. § 242. Hachuntesu, “im the barbarian gountries,” uoun Ist. decl. plur. loc. case, § 89. Prof. Wilson wrote: “Also even in the bor- dering countries, not as Prinscp proposes, ‘as well as the parts oc- cupied by the faithful.’’ Still there is no reason 10 qucstion the ren- dering given above. The word found in kooks is pachchanta, which by the regular mode of transliteration into the inscription charac- ter, making the dcuble ‘letters single, would Le precisely tle word as found cn the stone; and it is defined, in the native Pali voca- bularies, “Country of milekkhu,” the Sanskrit Mlechcha, ‘“‘barba- rian,” Yathd, “as,” adv. § 238. A, “to,” § 240.

Tanbupannt, “Ceylon.” There can be no reasonable doubt of the identity of Ceylon, and since it is said, “As iar as Cey:on,’’ the p'aces previously mentioned were prcbally between the wit’er and Ceylon, ana (164८ must be Coromandel. and Ketala, or Keruta, Malabar. Antiyalo, ^` Autiochus,” a Greek prince, standing apya- rently for the Yona couutiy, and hence is in the nomirative case, like tke nouns which precede. Ye. ‘those who,” rel. pron. masc. plur. nom. case. § 126, amreeing with rajano. Tusa, “of tat.” dem. pron. masc. sing. gen. case, § 122, agreeing with antiyakasa.

Chlikichha, “medical practices,” ncun 2st. deel. plur. nom. care. Prof Wiison wiote: “The term, chikichha, is said by Mr. Prinsep to be the Pali feim of, chikilsa, the application of 1emedies, Lut this is-questicnabie. It would 1ather be, chikichha, with a short, not a long 1; but in fact, the Pali form as if apperrs in vocal u- laries is. tikichha or tikicliclLha. The word is more probably the Prakrit form of, chikirsha, the wish or will to co: andthe edict in fact arnounces that it has been the twc-fo.d intenticn cf the Raja to provide, not plysic, Lut jocd, water, and shede {cr ani- mals and men’. This cniy proves the imperectiin cf existing Pali voc: bu:aries. Mr.Piinsep was Leyoud ah dcubt comect. The word, as itis reed ontlke stcne, is regulerly cerived ficm tle root Av, taking opticnally for its reduplicatiin, t, creche. § 204, 272- Kat, “have teen made,” pass. past part. of the reot hua, plur. ncm. case, agreeing with chikichhd. § 197, 110.

Osachdni, “medicines,” noun Ist. decl. neut. prur: § 90. Prof. Wilson wrotc: “Mendicaments cannot be meant by osadham. It 18 not in fact the Pali form of, aushadha, & mendicamert. but, o- shachi, a deciduous plant’’ It is fatal to oshaddu that it 18 feminine, while osadhdui is neuter, agreeing with osutun of the 1८०६8, aud since t, and dh are sometimes interchanged, § 22, the words are clearly identical, and Prinsep is connect. Hdid) tum, “have been carried” pass. pest part. of the 100t Jera, causative, reut. pir. num. case. Prot. Wilson wrote: “This term is of an unusual form, and doubtful purport.” It is the usual form in tle Pali Lool.s, where it signifies, as here, “to carry.” Further analysis 18 unnecessary, because the signification of the other wo ds ere not questioned.

182 'Pranslation.

Everywhere in the conquered [country] of king Piyadasi, be- loved of the devas, and also in the barbarian countries, as Co- romandel, Pada, Satiyaputa, Malabar, even as far as Ceylon, the Yona King Antiochus, and the monarch chieftains of that Antio- chus,

Everywhere the two medical practices of king Piyadasi, beloved of the devas, have been made, the medical practice for men, and the medical practice for beasts.

And wherever there were no medicines suitable for men, and suitable for beasts, thither they have been carried, and planted.

And wherever there were no roots and fruits, thither they have been carried, and planted.

And wells have been dug on the roads, and trees have been planted, for the enjoyment of man, and beast.

Professor H. H. Wilson’s Translation.

“In all the subjugated (territories) of the King Priyadasi, the beloved of the gods, and also in the bordering cvunitries, as (Choda), Palaya, (or Paraya,) Satyaputra, Keralaputra, Tamba- pani, (it is proclaimed,) and Antiochus by name, the Yona (or Yavana) Raja, and those princes who are near to, (or allied with) that monarch, universally (are apprised) that (two designs have been cherished by Priyadasi: one design) regarding men, and one relating to animals; and whatever herbs are useful to men or use- ful to animals, wherever there are none, such have been every- where caused. to be conveyed and planted, (and roots and fruits wherever there are none, such have been everywhere conweyed and planted; and on the roads) wells have been caused to be dug, (and trees have been planted) for the respective enjoyment of animals and men.”

Mr. Prinsep’s Translation.

“Everywhere within the conquered province of raja PryapDast the beloved of the Gods, as well as in the parts occupied by the faithful, such as Chola, Pida, Satiyaputra, and Ketalaputra, even as far as Tambapanni (Ceylon); and moreover within the domi- nions of ANnTiocHus, the Greek, (of which ANTIOCHUS’s generals are the rulers,) —everywhere the heaven-beloved raja Pryapasi’s double system of medical aid is established ;—both medical aid for men, and medical aid for animals; together with medicaments of all sorts, which are suitable for men, and suitable for animals. And wherever there is not (such provision)—in all such places they are to be prepared, and to be planted: both root-drugs and herbs, wheresoever there is not (a provision of them) in all such places shall they be depusited and planted.”

«And in the public highways wells are to be dug, and trees to be planted, for the accommodation of men and animals.” "ररपण

INDEX AND VOCABULARY.

xD x (^) a, an ॐ 9 akkhura 999 ० ०0०. aggi. GO We acha, or aja WE ००.००९ aja. पाय 4० 28 ajjha, for adhi ००८९ oy pee “ ००६९ atata a numeral, 9 9 atha, 328 athi, ©> adha. mB ati, a particle denoting 2202 . ५ (~+ tta, atra a3 mop Oe ०99 ० GIN attha, learned, S00 atha, ००३ adun, 200 adha, ८ adhama, 8 ग्व br &) >, anta, xD 15.6 antara, SD 3, Jugy antariyya,

A

@, or aN. a negative prefix. 110

a letter 14 excellent. Fire 35 go, move, 139. A goat 154 now, 136. Present tense 82 for ADBI before a vowel 134, 137 another 80, 135 @ unit with 84 cyphers 75

numeral eight, half 71 a bone 40 half 161 excess, much 186, 187 again, afterwards 27 here 135, 186 self 79 signification 14 a continuative particle 188 see amu, this, 57 below, down 137 low, vile 27 above, superiority 157 end, final 28

Within, or without 136, 138 an outer garment 24 42

184 9 4

०० anna, boiled rice 160 90$ 2002 andgata, future 165 1.1 an anchorite 23 Hoe) 5 andrdtan, perpetually 136 ०292 + near 70 Ds ane, after, alike 137 SO Pts off, from, away 137 SOO appa, small, 70 WOO apapan, a numeral & Unit with 77 ciphers 15 2०८5) 92 way, state of punishment 151 983 =, preposition and conj. upon, 187; and, also 138 9२ abbha gy abhi towards, upon 187 S09 ampttan, @ manera, & unit with 56 ciphers 75 9०५ amet, this, that 52 9०८) «ana, See pronoun JI 48 | 9०८3 ayan, this 51 2 4५, to go; iron 146 9०० ० ५4» a forest 16 9960 araha, to be worthy 162 ०6० ariya, a Buddhist Saint 152 ०० = aa, to adorn 148 59029 ५८८९४, lazy 146 SO 4) | away, down 137 00) WCSlo ००८१८, avocha he said 126 aa sa: to be 115; to eat | 145

9000 Ce} og] asangihyeyyan == © innumerable number 75 Boog ५५ a horse 158

@ ५१५, the anuswara sometimes inserted between words

2) 999 asana, 202. ० | $0008 ahahan, 9 numeral, Od ahan,

ॐ es ahi,

gaz009 ^

sa 4,

० 4,

9920924] “dra,

8909) dkhya,

90 ६५० dchariya,

+ स

92 9 Q ddichcha, SIO oem, ०200000 ०८००५, ०५] ay,

¬) ¬( 9) aha, ~~) ~ 9, alinta 9

t

ot

echchha, AX ध्‌ one । 1...

© th, ६८१८1,

a) A food eighty

the pronoun [I a snake

an exclamation

to desire

RD A

to

& sign

to say

a teacher beginning the sun yes

an abode age

he said a terrace

a I to go to wish either, other thus, so

@ unit with 70 ciphers

185

152 74 75

48

160

138 29

140

187 24

iV 66 170

136 169

. 40 125

22

129

127 80

136

168 Ri aos stti, ॐ woman RS KO ida, idha. here ४. NS tddnt, now ४ ४०००२०० ५400007 20470. Delhi ६8 indrt, a faculty RO émas this ६०००१ issara, the powerful-one भ~ १6४८, | to desire S209 tha, here Fj r 28 ध, like this ९25 90, a little ct सि ट उद u, Sanscrit ud, up 300 (०० 111 an eagle 285 uchchate, is said utia spoken = uttama, best 958009 udake water 58 ` udadhs the sea 25) ४०. uddharana an example 2308 unnéda to echo 20 wpa above, near, 20930 upakkama diligence 28 uppajja born

127,

149 186

187 187 126 142

7 22

2%

iv

132

137 154

111 189, 162

187

२ U २०००० 100९117 40/0 a teacher 157 20003 upapatr, a paramour 127 204 ४ over 138 ९६० uppalon 9 unit with 98 ciphers 75 ९६) (2202023 “payasd infirmity 170, 174 20! 5]$ uppadéna attachment 169 २०००० ubhaya both 23 ? 31 ura | breast 164 0099 usabha, 9, measure 25 2:39 ४७५0 a root of khus-khus 25 € E

COD eka, one 46 (2055) ekadd at one time 135 COD eta this, that 50

C3 ९८ like that 000 old cardamom, 18 CO evan, as, when 188 Goo 680 to wish 127

© °

Mo % for ava away 137 & speaking 142 = omaka inferior 22 ् best, son 23

0

188

K

+

K is often interchanged ‘with g, page 19, and sometimes with ch, page 189. Kkh often corresponds to q ksh in Sanskrit.

(p09 CCW

CD CBD

02089 MBI 29 02009$ OF} 028 ००६५०००> 098

००म्‌

02(922(9८022 ५८॥०।००१६

(> ९23

05)}38

on’ 309

kanya kana kahna, katara kattu katha kathénan kantara kapt kappilavata kamma kaya kura

karane

kari ००९ kara

kalignga kava

kasmira

kama, kémini, kdst

hai

kin

kita ong) hachchha medicine

a virgin 37 small 70 black 155 which? 80 a doer 64 speak, 140 ॐ unit with 126 ciphers _ 75 desirable 30 an ape

a city on the Gogra

a deed 66 the body, 144 to do, 99, 128, 132, 188, 134

instrument of action 145

a doer, an artificer 149 Coromandel

to paint 148 Cashmere

ॐ coin 19 to desire

willingly 186 Benares |

to buy | 94

who? which? ऋ 54 140, 109, 118

(2

cR° ‡ C 5) kinnukho

260 kilisa OQ ku 0० kuja 0० kudha ०२९ Me ०२०६ kute ५२३०० kudtala NS kubbha O2 ५8 kumudan O29 kuru, enh} kururd ॐ kusa ०९००३) 9 kussinndrun ८020 ~—CKesa 28 = व 02० = ket 02०&0८0208 kotippakote 025) 20 kosabbhi 02 } 209 kosala OR kwa (|

Occasionally Kh is represented in Sanskrit by ksh चु

@ 23 khanyja 9) > khanda khida

K 189 What? 133 vicious 104 bad, a particle 145, 152, 135 tobe angry 93, 145 summit 172 ten millions 75 a hoe 159 a pot 947 ॐ unit with 105 ciphers 75 the vicinity of Dehli the Osprey 157 to shine 150, 147 a city on the Gandak hair 148 any 80 ten millions 75 ten trillions 75 Kanouj Oude Where? ii, 80

Kh crooked footed 161 a division 66 a king, a prince 66 to alarm

131

५ 5 &

ay khama | to be patient $1

०० का 8 khanu to dig 131

2 ए to finish, end 25, 178

28 khujja crooked backed 162

Co) kho | indeed 82 0 न

| Sometimes g is inserted between words, it often represents ` इ in the root, page 19, sometimes j, page 139, and occasionally, y, page 140. G in Pali often stands for gr in Sanskrit.

Oo, wei go 91, 124 OR gandha odour | 175 082 4. Afghanistan

005 yahna to take 98 O89 gandhappa, a celestial musician 171 ०५ gam, gO ad 124 ०९९ “4, ०९२ garuda, ॐ on 160, 171 0000 १००४०, (>0@ gavaja the gayal 20 029 १०८, to take, a house 82, 66, 131 }© gama a village 29 Coo ०५५०४ 8 07008 sindti sings 103, 111 8 gt to sing 111 तेत une a good attribute 44, 148 १० gupa to guard 98 co) 9 an ox 42, .158

wo ah

Occasionally gh is interchanged with g, page 124, In Sanskrit. it corresponds sometimes to ghr.

——

ay ah

| we ghatd a water jar

2008 ghdna th> nose

200) ghata ०2 hana to kill

८) = 910० Quo 0५4५ = to take

©

200) ghama to go

२००) ghara a house

९20 १८5० to eat

© Ch

191 158 176 158 G3 124 70 107

Sometimes ch, is interchanged with /, page 139, sometimes with j, page 19, and chchha may represent ch, t, th, d, bh, m, 8, or "9 pige 139, 138, 142. Chch in Pali occasionally represents

ty in Sanskrit, and chchh is sometimes ksh in Sanskrit.

© ` cha ५ ( 2 chakkhu

OAH changkamati (८9 yuna BOOS

© chaja Or chala om chatu < 220 ८१८८५८१८...

3 chara ©०9 charana OiO chapa 8 chi : 8०; chikichchhuti 84 chtran Qo chuba

<) chura sam chora

त्य

and 138 the eye 173 108, 1 4

to abandon 130 to shake 114 four 47, 71, 76 the moon 170 to observe 144 the foot 172 a bow 143 to assemble 104 practises medicine 113 a long time 135 to kiss 154 to steal 102, 152 ॐ thief 152

199

30 chha 208 chhada

30° Ohh

>¬ Ohh

six to cover to cut 112,

@ J

aa 140 131, 95

Sometimes j is represented by g, page 149, by gng, by ttt, by th, page 140, and occasionally it represents g, gh, page 113, d,dh, page 140, 183, y, page 20, ®, page 141, and h, page 113.

aw jate ग $ jana ०५ jara @2० 4५५4 @ ००९६६ jalani dh @० 020० Jager @o8 4 8 i Ban ५४५

ai

० 1. 84} द GOO juta

birth 170, 29 bear, be born 134 old, age 126, 174 a net 143 ocean 25 knows 125 to awaken 103 meditating 170 to conquer 134, 19 old 710, 182 to grow old 126 tongue 176 to shine 106 ९१ Jh

Jh sometimes represents dh, page 59, 91.

९2 jhasa

miraculous power a fish a cricket

3

mM 193 po y | 1

WN 22 -“

900 nyd to know 134, 125, 144, 178

he Occasionally th, is interchanged with th, page 18, and some- times with dh, page 19, When the second consonant of a word, it often indicates the passive past participle, page 130. In the following verb it is.represented in Sanskrit by dh.

GI tha to place, stand 91, 103 D ९ 200 daha to burn 131 o †

T is sometimes inserted between words, page 28, sometimes it is interchanged with dh, page 19, sometimes it is changed to chch, page 140, and occasionally it represents j, page, 140, and

n, pege 141, Tt usually. corresponds to ré in Sanskrit. © 800 takkasila Taxilla

०2९. tuchchha to hew 159 ooago ५. concupiscience 165 oD 10110 ००3 ५८४2 {7616 185 रः tatiy third 76 02 थ thus, besides 135, 23 og) = then 189 on tapa to burn 130, 174 02220 = fapasa asceticism 161 029 tapha to please 170

००६०४ tampapani Ceylon 11

194 ©> 7 029 tara to cross, descend 132 0708 = ४ goo" fakin there 136 22080 ५५० forty 73 002009 tayo © fi ४ three 46, 71 Ba ५५ beyond 154 Boa tila sesamum 143 Roo {5८ thirty 2 O2 but 138 2१ fda to pain 140 oqa funda a snout 147 ०१५० ५०५५ a horse 142 ८2@ = 4 a light 170 02 twan 099 tuhman thou ‘a g 7 D is sometimes inserted between words, page 65. Tt 18

occasionally changed to chchh, to jj, to ४, and to tr, page 140.

Sa sq SQ 36) aac 3O 309 399

3)

8 388 80

So)

danda

* dandt

damu

dare

dala

dava U0 duya dasa

dusa

da

datta

diva

diva

a stick 14) a pilgrim 85 to tame 131, 144 to dread 144, to shine 108 goes 104 ten 71 to be wicked 145 to give 91, 127, 32 a sickle 159 to play 94 96 by day 136

g D

195

Bo9 disa, ॐ place, to see, speak 125, 129, 153 g du to pain, ill 150, 187 ५2५० dutiya second 76 १०६ dukkha pain 174 ००५०९०० duhitita a daughter 65 C380 deva a deva 13 C30] 3 800 devananptya ४25७८ & king of Ceylon 1 8} 399 48a at night, sin 186, 174 219 dwdre, a door 143 Dh

©

Dh is interchanged with both th and th, page 19, and is sometimes changed to jh, page 91, 59.

Qn tanya

oO dhama

© 3 dhamma dhara

००

faye) dha

2343 dhttita

C @ dhe

?

paddy 31 property 111, 148 to discipline 91 law 144 to hold 108 to bear 134, 150 daughter 65 a root 25 to drink 150 N

N is sometimes inserted between words, page 28, some- times it is interchanged with n, page 182, and is occasionally chang-

ed to ¢, page 141. When the

second consonant of a word, it

is more often a formative than a radicle.

ॐ ma, @$2 no 903 nahi

no, not 136

45

7a nacha ? ५ ‡<० natha 38 nadt १ nama > १ nara 30 nave

१०1० navuti

> Se) 9 OD nahutan

प्‌ ninnahutan Sa OD NLUAA $080 nana > a ~ nagara ne ९० TE nirabpidan nirt ९ = 9 ¬© ntrodha $000

९ | श

nissa

pata

> N

to dance

a lord

a river

to bow, glory a man

nine

ninety

130, 140 161

88

108, 162 160

71

74

ॐ unit with 28 ciphers 75

a unit with 35 ciphers 75

variously

a city to guide, in

146 143

137, 134

a unit with 63 ciphers 75

hell extinction to trust in without

near

८) P

66

P is often interchanged with b, page 19, and frequently re- Lp in Sanskrit is occasionally pp

presents pr in Sanskrit.

in Pali.

(> pa प्र pra

(2020402 pakarana

(0 = Page

0209

Oo pacha

before a book

in the morning paggahya, OUD gaha taken up

cook

137

८) P 197 09, pachchha to ask 130 62009 pachehato behind 135 (¢ 4 effect 169 OpR panycha five 47, 71 690009 panydea fifty 73 ० panya wisdom 68 Og pata to surround 147 ०६१ pathana prayer 162 ० a2'}o3 puatarikan ` a unit with 119 ciphers 75 ८202 244 to gO 158 Od ८६ pati, 7० प्रती master, back 19, 137 0008 pathavt the earth 65 (23 pada to go, ॐ word 81 ८28 puti a foot-path 25 (०१०५ paduma a lotus 19 O36 paduman a unit with 112 ciphers 75 O9 9 to accumulate 0:22 pappata a mountain 110 (3८028 pamddo carelessness 86 09199 pee diligence 153 09 para another 81 (26) para back, excess 137 08 pari around, very 137, 182 08 280 parideva lamentation 170 O36,9AQ9 parokkhd the perfect tense 82 004 pavara excellent 171 (>. $ pahind abandoned. 26

८) + Slo ४८४ oO} papu oO) pale

(2) 2928 Pasdda S pi 8 api 8g pithe Sap ४० 6० = ४५ S00 pia १९ putta ५? pune QQ puppha 0५9 pumd ५०2०099 Purato Q@ puja १५ tira पे $00 purisa घ 99 prichchha

७

oP

to drink, preserve 134, 13

Ph is sometimes interchanged with bh, page 19.

une ald 4 asu ac a (9८७ phala G05 phassu phothappa

COISO

wicked, sin 69 to obtain 97, 104 a line 18, 18, 10 a spire, a temple 154 and 138 the back 161 a lump, boiled rice 30 a father 41 67 beloved ii ४ son 164 again 184 a flower 31 a male 39, 67 before 135 to offer 144, ॐ country, to fill 132 a man 84, 158 scorpio 16 Ph

a lunar mansion 19 an ax 159 to finish, bear fruit 91 to find, feel touch 178

© B 199

© B

B is often interchanged with v, page 19, sometimes with p, and occasionally with bh, page 112, 151.

© £ bata firm 70 OA! bandhu a kinsman 68 831 bindu a drop, unit with 49 ciphers 154,75 ७०००९ baranast Benares ~ balla strong, strength 68 @.> daha to obtain 131 ५० budha ५० bujha tu know 59, 162, 130, 140 ५०६ byakkha a tiger 10 &8 bravi to say 125 OQ brahma (Gegcw a Brahmin 66, 170 0 Bh

Bh is interchanged with ph, page 19, and is changed occa- sionally to chchh, and ddh, page 141.

200 bhaga glory 148 39900) bhagavd a lord 164 >> bhaja to enjoy 96 00 bhaya to fear 152 ००००त& balagunt a lunar mansion 19 No bhava 62008, bhonta your Lordship 78 ~} ` bhd to shine 149 ~} ० bhatu 5] 029 bhatara a brother 40 - 029 ९५८९८ to speak 129 Bog bhikkhu a priest 86, 65 83 bhida to distribute,divide 103 131

46

bhuja bhujaga ९0४ bhumt

bo

9 Bh to eat 107 a snake 142 to be 98, 112, 117 earth । a term of address 18S" ८3 ॥

M is sometimes inserted between words, page 28, and when the second consonant of a root, it is occasionally inter: changed with chchh, page 141, and n, page 181.

०२९० makuté

७० COO ८९८७ O@ ८8

maga magada manggala maja mada, machchhd

majuty

majhame. .

mata — mats matha madhura mane matte mune mane

mania

a crest, tiara 171. to gO 147 Maguda 148; fortunate 147 to squeeze in the hand 91 to madden 91, 148 intoxication 148 power 158. middle , , ४ knowledge 141

wisdom, death 87, 148 to nourish, box 92, 140

Madura on the Jumna 165

to mind, know 148 knowledge 148 an ascetic 148 to know, think 194; - 145 man 171

Q009

6W000D0003 mahdakathanan

oo 29

O09 oo. ५००१ ५०३ ५०० ८०८० ८29 Ss

CO ag ५० ५2० ५०० COO 6००७० ८५०९

QOO

MANUNESA

masura maha

maha

mahinea

mahun

mé prohibitive particle

mat la mdna mara mala

mdsa

mida cage metti

mucha muda mudha musa mula medha moka mokkha

mansa

a peacock 143 to. die- 141, 148 death 174 a boxer ह 140 to शद्ध IAT: man 148, 150 a pea 147 to worship 92 great 152 ॐ unit with 133 ciphers 75 a buffalo 143° often | 167 to love, measure 91, 136 a mother 41, 67 to love, respect 67 death, Kama 160° a flower 14% a month 161. love 140’ to free 108, 178, to enjoy 93: in vain 186 to break 147 a root 25 understanding 69 folly 174, 182 to loose, free

flesh

202 na ¥

oo र

Y is sometimes inserted between words, page 29, it 18 some- times interchanged with j, page 20, when the last of a com- pound character, it often represents t, page 24, exceptionally it is changed to 7 page 92, occasionally it stands for h, in the root, and when added in conjugation is most usually changed to the preceding consonant, thus doubling it, page 91, 133.

Od ४० who, which, what 53 000 yakkha ००६ a 06100 161 (> yaja to worship 92 ०० yatta 009 yatra where 135 (>060223 ४५ ` wherefore 138 00009 yatha as 29, 135, 154 008) yada ` when 135 ८०8 ५० if, when 138 ००५ 9१९८ to restrain 127 goog ५५९५० ask 129 OOD0 ४५५८ as mueh as 135, 154 ५१० yuja to join, unite 139, 93, 130 १५१ ४१996700 the Jumna

COOH? ४११८५५० & +> {58

ae. अ

R is sometimes inserted between words, page 29, when the second radical ofa root, it is changed occasionally to ४ dt, or mm, page 141, it is sometimes interchanged with 1 page 20, and Ss occasionally rejected before the termination of the passive past participle, page 131, 142.

००६ rakkha to guard 129

Jo rucha to shine 93

म? £03

a raja to possess passion 178 ०5 ratha, desiring 140 ५ 38 ratte nizht | 170 ०29 ratha 2 carriage , . 147 qo ramu to enjoy 129, 166 ०160539 ravthansa 9. sun-duck | 157 939 aes taste 175 20 १६९० | passion, rage 174 न्‌) raja + ¢ 2 †“ a king 42, 66 ॥ e e

to Imjure 177 goaQoo rajagriha Rajagriha in Maguda Go richa to destroy 139 ००० rite without 188 Qa ruja to be sick 142 ९० = dha. to hinder, obstruct 95,131

r ५ । ति to confuse 104 r m0 Qoo! "lima lustre 68 (9 rupa % en to form, an image 34, 67, 161 ०० ~ dust 149 © 7

etween words, page 29, occasion=— page 20, and when the last conso-

the participial ¢, page131.

L is sometimes inserted b ally it is interchanged with 7, nant ofa word, it sometimes represents

CoO lakkha to mark, notice 6;

००४ lakkhan a lack a5

(023 ५५४५ to obtain 94

(02009 4५०० a reaper 143 likkha to write

न 47

204

CCOOND

loka

COORD ehita

©

© L to smear 130 to cut, reap 143 the world 153 red nee V

V is sometimes inserted between words, page 29, it is often changed to b, page 19, when a second radicle it is occasionally chan- ged to ¢t, page 141, when the last consonant in a verb, it often represents u, in the root, page 93, and when the last of a com- pound letter, it is often u, changed in Permutation, page 26.

00g OBI? Og OO» 0 083 08

Og

oF

09

vakkha

vaghandé

vacha

vuchana 00D) tachasa eucnchhé vatta vada vanda vadhe vama oO ५ VaMuU vara

varan

to say 126 a porch 22 to speak 91, 126, 142 a word 78, 144 dwelling 141 a garment 141 to speak 144 to worship 182, 146 a daughter in law 88. to vomit 131, 142 to preserve 14] better 70 to dwell, live, 180, 141, 160 to flow 92

to go, blow, or 138, 145 wind 143 an ax | 159

a particle, ex-dis-un 137

8९20 vinydna

88

8 3 vina

8300 vinaya

ध. ~

8 De vibhamu

8 ८ ¬0 ६५२८१80

8 ५२ vimukha

8 ८५ © ९५00८110 © mucha 8 ०20 virdga 89 virajja 8 8 © vivicha

Can |e | ~ ay visara

K vtht

80500 vihita

862 a

०| ere vutis

०|8 vuddhe

०/9 vudha ore vuda ९19 . ^^

०० ४५८0

00 id

coon, ५

05 veda

0००५०08 ०८४ CO 399 vedand

©

205 knowledge 160 knowledge 178 to know 104, 140, 147 to instruct 148, 145 the Viniya 145, besides 138 to turn 131 to investigate 114 an ugly face 152 to liberate 103, 176 unpassioned 178 to be solitary | 133 pre-eminent 69 to gO 181 paddy 159 adjudged 26 twenty 72 2 commentary 24 increase iv to increase 91, 141

be done, finished 178, 128

to increase, grow 92 to go, certainly 186, 149 a bamboo 149 the Veda 147 a city on the Gandak

sensation 169

206 99 8 : © 8

S when the second radical, is occasionally changed to ch- chh, to jjh, and dh, page 141

22 8 990 &4 5 tan 5 nan he, she, it 49 5500 gab to be able, own $1, 79 2०००४ sakata Oude 10, 17 9598 sakht ~~) sakhd ॐ friend 66, 42 995 sangkhya & number 23 995) १ sangkhdra | existance 170 209 sachcha truth 140 59 2 sanycha to quiet 140 ०० कविर sayjana the virtuous = 92 2५९ sata to manifest 169 ~> g sathi sixty 73 209) to be true 140 2008 satan one hundred 75 (>) ००१००००१ a thousand 75 ~50>06 satatdn 9080 sand perpetually 136. 093 satta Beven 71 0093 > sattd a teacher 156 209303 satiate 20998 8011202 Seventy 74 20g sadda sound, word 156 9090 saddhé faith 22 0 ॐ santa peace 111 903g sanadda, modesty 170 909 sabpa >) & sabba all, every 43, 135 2909 = ०९१ a Buddhist priest 153 D 320 samphassa impression 178

24 8 शः

sanya sate saddhin sammd samma samu samuddha sayan sara sartra sala salla

sasa

saha 2५ suman san

sankhita

sangha

sansdra

sdkha

sddi

samt

sddhu ~> “प्‌ 2 séhu sddha

perception circumspection, caution

with 138: near 156. well, good, complete 142 to quiet . 131 the ocean 110 own | 79; to remember, a vowel 181 the body

to enter, go

an arrow 20 a hare 10 with 138. with 187, 139.

abridgment, epitome vi

-achurch, assembly 78

world-misery 152 a branch 132 equal to it, like 149 a master, lord yes, good 26, 186 firm Ayodhya a. 136 golden | ` ‰५ to teach, mustard 29

` # sleep 129.

48

Boo 34028

82850 st hala

526

०३०००५३ sundti

290005 sukatan

230 ॐ sugandha

099 sukha

a ५ ^ sugupa

29089 SUNG

290 sucha

29 30 sunukha

2393 sutta

290 supa

2० = supave

9950 . bubha

290 8Uuva

DQ0c%9 suvanne

220 on 098 suvanna bhume 24१ sure ०००१५ Asura 2०02 seta

CMD #0 29209 ५००

Cc 320026) sokara 3320 305 sokandhtkan C2900 sola @200g90 solasa

~ §

to pour 130

a disciple iv Ceylon to hear, praise, well 137, 156

he hears, praises

doing well, merit 24 good smell

happiness 89, 163 to hide 130 a dog ° 10 to grieve 142 a dog 132 an aphorism iv to sleep 180 a monkey 10 to gore 96. to injure 141 gold 146, 161 Thatung, Pegu

angel, fallen angel 171 white

six 71 grieving 142 hog 143.

a unit with 91, ciphers 75- the ear 22, 175

sixteen 15, 72 ४.

of

(0 FZ 209

H

H in the formation of words is sometimes changed to chehh, and occasionally to y, page 141, and in reduplieation to j, page 118.

OO 8 hatte

८०४ hana 2000 ghata

OD 3 handa

00g hara

(०29 ५५

29 4 ह 3. (+ hiyate | OB ht

es: 5 hitan

0300) himavd

9:31 9 1150

५१ hu

००५०००५३ 4५१०६

4०६० 111. ५१०५ huvat C0009 hetu 26 (५७४८४

an elephant 65 to kill 129, 184, 149 now 136 to carry 80, 107 to rejoice 129 to reject 146 is rejected 26, 92

to go, if, certainly 186 fit, proper

frost and snow 68 | to injure, kill 104 to be, sacrifice 121, 145 | he offers

he offers 19 he offers

& cause | 150 thus 620, 18

Printed and published at the Karen Institute Press, by F. Mason.